JP6467718B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area 2A by a launching device, and when a game ball is won in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area 2A, a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded to the player. There are things that will be paid out. Further, a variable display area capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display area becomes the specific display result, the game state (game There is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state where the gaming machine is controlled) (so-called pachinko machine).

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display area by operating the start lever, and the player By operating a stop button provided corresponding to the display area, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display areas is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so-called slot machine).

  The game value means that a prize ball is paid out or that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area 2A of the gaming machine is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball, or advantageous for a player. For example, generating a right to enter a certain state, or becoming a state in which a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of effect symbols (identification information) that starts in the variable display area based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display a symbol (final stop symbol). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. A game in a round may be referred to as a round game.

  In the variable display area, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left middle right symbol) continue for a predetermined period of time and stop and shake in a state that matches the specific display result. It can be a big hit before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaling, or deforming, or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. If the display result of the symbol variably displayed in the variable display area is not a specific display result, the display is “lost”, and the variable display state is terminated. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Such a gaming machine is provided with detection means (for example, a push button sensor, a stick controller tilt sensor, a trigger button sensor) capable of detecting the player's movement, and is based on detecting the player's movement during the effective period. Some perform a specific performance. In such a case, there is an indication that suggests an effective period (for example, a time gauge) (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-93049 (FIGS. 19 to 21)

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, the suggested effective period and the actual effective period are the same, so the interest was insufficient.

  Then, an object of this invention is to provide the gaming machine which can improve interest.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and variable display means (for example, a decorative display for displaying identification information (for example, decorative symbols)) in a predetermined direction. Image display device 5 and the like), notice effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notice effect (for example, full-screen notice effect and the like) (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S322A and S344A), and a special Special effect execution means capable of executing effects and detection means capable of detecting the player's action (for example, a push sensor 35B capable of detecting a pressing operation on the push button 31B. An operation on other operation members can be detected. (E.g., a trigger sensor 75 capable of detecting a pressing operation on the trigger button 74, a tilt direction sensor unit capable of detecting a tilting operation on the stick controller 31A). 76), or a non-contact type sensor such as an infrared sensor or a motion sensor.) And an indication indicating the effective period of operation (for example, the first effective period) For example, the display of the first effective period gauge) is performed, and the suggestion display execution means (for example, step S2610 in the production control microcomputer 90) changes the display mode of the suggestion toward a predetermined mode (for example, the end mode). , S3307) and before the display mode of the suggestion display changes to the predetermined mode, a predetermined condition based on the detection of the motion (for example, 10 operations on the push button 31B is detected. If the state changes from the beginning, the meter, numerical value, display effect (effect that defeats the enemy character), and the lighting of the lamp may be in a predetermined state. A specific effect execution means (for example, the part for executing step S2622 in the effect control microcomputer 90) capable of executing the specific effect (for example, the first specific effect) when the condition is established. The predetermined notice effect is executed so as to make the display mode of the identification information invisible or difficult to see at the start of variable display (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps S322A and S344A, FIG. (B2), a blackout effect in which a decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 71 (B2) or FIG. 73 (B2) cannot be visually recognized), the identification information is stored when the predetermined notice effect is executed. It is possible to start variable display in a predetermined direction after elapse of the execution period of the notice effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S322A). 69 (B2), 71 (B2), or FIG. 73 (B2), after the execution period of the blackout effect shown in FIG. 69 (D2), (E2), FIG. 71 (D), (E) or 73 (D2), and the special effect executing means can execute the special effect in a display area common to the predetermined notice effect. The special effect can be executed at a first timing when the predetermined notice effect is executed, and the special effect is the first timing when the predetermined notice effect is not executed. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied , the suggestion display execution unit stops changing the display mode of the suggestion display before the display mode of the suggestion display changes to the predetermined mode. Can be (For example, the production control microcomputer 90 can avoid the execution of step S2610 and stop the change in the first effective period gauge by performing steps S2606 to S2608 or steps S2612 to S2615. It is possible). According to such a configuration, since the change of the suggestion display stops, the actual effective period may be longer than the appearance of the suggestion display, and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (Means 2) In the means 1, the specific effect executing means detects that the action is continuously detected by the detecting means (for example, detecting ten operations (continuous hitting) on the push button 31B. Continue for a certain time or more. The specific operation is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied with the predetermined operation as a predetermined condition (for example, the presentation control microcomputer 90 performs the number of times in step S2620). Step S2622 can be executed only when P is “10”. According to such a configuration, it can be seen that the effective period of continuous operation has been extended, and the interest can be improved.

  (Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the effect display (for example, display of the first number gauge) is performed, and the display mode of the effect display is changed stepwise based on the operation detected by the detecting means. An effect display execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 90 that executes step S2619) is provided, and the suggestion display execution means determines the display mode of the effect display by the effect display execution means (for example, the first effective display mode). During the period, when the first operation to the push button 31B is detected, the first area is stored until the first area may be stored until the predetermined area after the second area may be stored). When changed, it is possible to stop the change of the display mode of the suggestion display (for example, the production control microcomputer 90 performs step S260). Only if it is Y, it is possible to avoid a step S2610) may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately stop the suggestion display change.

  (Means 4) A notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect (for example, display of “continuous hitting plus”) for notifying that the change of the display mode of the suggestion display is stopped in any of the means 1 to 3. For example, the production control microcomputer 90 may include a part for executing step S2608). According to such a structure, it can prevent misinterpreting that the stop of the change of suggestion display is a malfunction.

  (Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the suggestion display execution means includes a first suggestion display (for example, patterns A2 and A4) in which the actual effective period and the suggested effective period coincide with the actual effective period. It is possible to perform a second suggestion display (for example, patterns A1 and A3) in which the period and the suggested effective period do not match (for example, the production control microcomputer 90 performs the first operation by performing step S3911). It is also possible to set a first effective period according to the first operation effect pattern by selecting an effect pattern and performing step S3304. According to such a configuration, even if it is the first suggestion display, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for stopping the change of the display mode of the suggestion display.

  (Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, a first promotion notification (for example, an operation promotion display of the push button 31B) for prompting a player's first action (for example, an operation of the push button 31B) and a game Step S8105 in the promotion notification means (for example, in the effect control CPU 120, for example) that performs the second promotion notification (for example, the operation promotion display of the stick controller 31A) that prompts the user's second operation (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A) Before executing the operation promotion display determined in step S293A, and the first promotion notification and the second promotion notification, a plurality of pre-promotion notifications (for example, the common effect shown in FIG. 42). Various operation promotion such as 2 button effect, 4 button effect and 4V effect Pre-promotion notification means for performing one pre-promotion notification (for example, a portion for executing the operation promotion display determined in step S293B by executing step S8105 in the effect control CPU 120). The detection means can detect the first operation and the second operation (for example, the tilt direction sensor unit 76 and the push sensor 35B can detect the operation of the push button 31B and the operation of the stick controller 31A. ), An effect executing means (for example, the step 1208 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a predetermined effect (for example, cut-in effects AC) based on the detection result of the detecting means, thereby executing the cut-in effect. The portion that executes the cut-in effect determined in the determination process) is further provided and promoted Notification mode (for example, which of the common effect, 2 button effect, 4 button effect, or 4V effect) is displayed before the operation promotion, and the types of the first promotion notification and the second promotion notification (for example, Depending on which operation promotion display of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, etc.), the proportion of notifications of effects (for example, cut-in effects C, etc.) that are advantageous to the player differ as the predetermined effects. Also good. According to such a structure, the interest of a game can be improved.

  (Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, a promotion display means (for example, a portion that executes steps S2611 and S3307 in the production control microcomputer 90) that performs a promotion display that prompts the player's action is provided. When the player's motion is continuously detected during execution of the promotion display, the promotion display means displays the display mode of the promotion display (for example, the first display mode, the first display mode, etc.) according to the period during which the operation is continuously detected. (For example, the production control microcomputer 90 may change the first effective period indicated by the first effective period gauge in step S2611.) By executing the first operation promotion display according to the remaining time, the display mode of the first operation promotion display is changed according to the elapsed first effective period) It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by performing an effect that is not monotonous.

  (Means 8) In the means 1, the predetermined direction is a normal direction (for example, a forward direction of a decorative pattern as shown in FIGS. 69D1, D2, E1, and E2). May be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

(Means 9) In the means 1 or 8, the predetermined notice effect is an effect that suggests an expectation degree to be in an advantageous state, and is an effect that is executed in a manner of hiding a part or all of the identification information (for example, As shown in FIG. 63 (B), the full-screen notice effect is more easily displayed in the case of a big hit than in the case of losing, and is an effect (see FIG. 69 (B2)) in which the entire decorative symbol is hidden. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand.
.

  (Means 10) In any one of the means 1, means 8, and means 9, the variable display means can variably display the identification information in a specific direction (for example, reverse direction) different from the predetermined direction ( For example, the decoration control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S322C and S345B variably displays decorative symbols in a reverse direction different from the forward direction as shown in FIGS. 69 (B1) and 71 (B1). You may do it. According to such a configuration, the direction of variable display becomes diversified, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  (Means 11) In the means 10, the variable display means variably displays the identification information in a specific direction at least during the execution period of the predetermined notice effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), FIG. 75, at least For example, the decorative symbols may be variably displayed in the reverse direction during the screen notice effect execution period). According to such a configuration, after the identification information is variably displayed in a specific direction, it can be variably displayed in a predetermined direction different from the specific direction, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  (Means 12) In any one of the means 1, means 8 to means 11, the identification information notice can be executed at the start of variable display in a predetermined direction (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps S322B and S345). 69 (B1) and 73 (B1), the symbol notice effect can be executed, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the identification information notice.

  (Means 13) In any one of the means 1, means 8 to means 12, when executing the identification information notice and the predetermined notice effect, the identification information notice is executed after the end of the predetermined notice effect (for example, in step S322D). After the end of the full screen notice effect shown in FIG. 69 (C2) and FIG. 73 (C2), the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process performs the symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 69 (D2) and FIG. 73 (D2). Or the like). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the identification information advance notice and the predetermined advance notice effect from being executed at the same time, and the identification information advance notice is not visible or difficult to see due to the predetermined advance notice effect. Can be prevented.

  (Means 14) In any one of the means 1, means 8 to means 13, an adjustment means (for example, step S706) that can adjust the effect according to the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) by the player at least during execution of variable display. An effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of S707) and an adjustment image (for example, the adjustment result image R shown in FIGS. 74B to 74D) corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means for a predetermined period (for example, the predetermined period T1). Adjustment image display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S708, S703, and S704). The adjustment image display means derives and displays the variable display result within the predetermined period. In the predetermined period, the adjustment image cannot be visually recognized in the period in which the variable display result is derived and displayed (for example, the derived display period T2). Or patronage CPU120 and it executes the processing of step S710～S712) or the concealment (e.g. adjust image translucent display, and it, etc.) or a flashing display, may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed.

  (Means 15) In the means 14, at least a part of the display area of the adjustment image may overlap with at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 59A). According to such a configuration, the adjustment image result image that overlaps at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result is erased, so that a reduction in the visibility of the variable display result can be suppressed.

  (Means 16) The error image may not be deleted during the derivation display of the variable display result in the means 14 or the means 15 (see, for example, FIG. 59 (D2)). According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

  (Means 17) In any one of the means 14 to 16, priority is given to the display of the error image over the display of the adjusted image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the abnormality notification command in the process of step S57 determines that the command is Until the error shown is resolved, the error image display as shown in FIGS. 59D1 and 59D2 may be continued).

  (Means 18) In any of the means 14 to 17, the demonstration display is kept visible when the adjustment operation is performed (see, for example, FIG. 59B), but when the menu display operation is performed. The demonstration display may be erased (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of steps S659, S660, and S662). According to such a configuration, a demonstration display can be suitably performed.

(Means 19) In any one of the means 14 to the means 17, a decision means for deciding whether or not to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) (for example, game control for executing the process of step S239) CPU 103 of the microcomputer 100) and display means for variably displaying the identification information and deriving and displaying the variable display result according to the determination result of the determination means (for example, effect control for executing the processes of steps S325, S348, and S350) CPU 120, etc.) and special effect execution means capable of displaying a special effect image during execution of variable display of identification information (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing the change effect character display process in step S162). , Special effect images can be placed at positions that overlap at least ahead of a part of the identification information (For example, see FIG. 57 (B)), the special effect execution means displays the display mode of the special effect image at a position overlapping the front side of the identification information during the period in which the variable display result of the identification information is derived. May be set in a stationary state (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of step S609). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent misrecognition of the display result.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command which the microcomputer for game control transmits. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command which the microcomputer for game control transmits. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process in the special symbol process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st operation reception process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st operation reception process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd operation reception process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd operation reception process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in an effect display apparatus. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st operation effect pattern lottery table, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd operation effect pattern lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change in effect control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation | variation stop process in an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in a 1st operation effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in a 2nd operation effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation presentation determination processings, such as a button, in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number in a modification. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the operation promotion display determination table in a modification, (B), (C) is a figure which shows an example of the display determination table before operation promotion at the time of a push button and a stick controller. It is. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for cut-in effect determination in a modification. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows the setting example of various commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the character display process for a change effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific setting which displays various images. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of an adjustment result image. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the display period of an adjustment result image, and the derivation display period of a variable display result. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of a full screen notice effect setting process, (B) is a figure which shows the example of determination of a full screen notice effect. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a symbol notice effect setting process, (B) is a figure showing a decision example of a symbol notice effect, and (C) is a figure showing a decision example of a type of a symbol notice effect. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of a symbol reverse direction start display setting process, (B) is a figure which shows the example of a determination of a symbol reverse direction start display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a symbol notice effect timing adjustment process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation | variation of a decoration design and each notice effect, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation | variation of a decoration design and each notice effect, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation | variation of a decoration design and each notice effect, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the change of the decoration design of modification 1, each notice effect, etc. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the design reverse direction start display setting process of the modification 2, (B) is a figure which shows the example of determination of the classification of the design reverse start display of the modification 2. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation | variation of the decoration pattern of the modification 3, each notice effect, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of execution production of the modification 3.

(First embodiment)
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings (FIGS. 1 to 42). First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment as viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame formed in a frame shape that is provided on the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. The structure including the board 2).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame, there is an upper plate (hitting ball supply plate) 8A. Below the upper plate 8A, there are provided a lower plate (surplus ball receiving tray) 8B for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper plate 8A, and a hitting operation handle (operating knob) for firing the hit ball. A game board (gauge board) 2 is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame. The game board 2 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 2 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 2A is formed on the front surface of the game board 2 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the lower plate 8B is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate), and the player holds a plurality of pieces. A stick controller 31A that can be tilted in the direction (front / rear / left / right) is attached. It should be noted that the stick controller 31A has a predetermined operation by, for example, performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 74 (see FIG. 3) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 75 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like on the trigger button 74 is provided inside the operation stick of the stick controller 31A. 3) is built-in. Further, a tilt direction sensor unit 76 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the main body of the lower plate 8B below the stick controller 31A. The stick controller 31A incorporates a vibrator motor 77 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 31A to vibrate.

  The member that forms the upper plate 8A includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3) for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate 8A at the position where the push button 31B is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portions of the upper plate 8A and the lower plate 8B. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of push button 31B and stick controller 31A as the position put to either the right or left in an upper plate and a lower plate, maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment position of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A is not in a vertical positional relationship, but may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  An effect display device (image display device) 5 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 2A. The display area (display screen) of the effect display device 5 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) synchronized with variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 5 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a decorative symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The decorative symbol display area includes three display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, but the position of the decorative symbol display area may not be fixed in the display area of the effect display device 5. The positional relationship between the three display areas may not be fixed. The effect display device 5 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer 90 (see FIG. 3) mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 3). When the display control microcomputer 90 performs variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display (first special symbol display device) 4A, the effect display device 5 uses the variable display. When effect display is executed and variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the second special symbol display (second special symbol display device) 4B, effect display is performed on the effect display device 5 along with the variable display. Since it is executed, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  Further, in the effect display device 5, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 5 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “losing” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit. In the drawings, “miss” may be described as “out of”.

  In addition, although the case where the change display of an effect symbol is performed as an effect of the liquid crystal display in the effect display device 5 is described here, the effect performed by the effect display device 5 is not limited to the change display of the effect symbol. An effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, in addition to performing a battle production where professional wrestling and soccer matches and enemy characters fight, if it is a big hit, it will produce a victory for the game or battle, and if it is a loss, it will produce an effect to defeat the game or battle. Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 5, a fourth symbol display area (fourth symbol display area) 5P for displaying the fourth symbol after the effect symbol, the special symbol (described later) and the normal symbol (described later). , 5Q are provided. Here, the 4th symbol display area 5P for the 1st special symbol in which the 4th symbol's variation display for the 1st special symbol is performed in synchronization with the 1st special symbol's variation display which will be described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 5Q for the second special symbol in which the variable symbol of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is displayed in synchronization with the variation display.

  As described above, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed on the effect control microcomputer 90 side). This is performed by measuring the variation time recognized based on the command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 5, for example, an effect in which the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects, such as being performed, and effects such as moving objects blocking all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display area on the effect display device 5 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, by further displaying the variation of the 4th symbol in a part of the display area of the effect display device 5, the state of the 4th symbol is confirmed to surely recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. It is possible. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation, and is not disappeared from the screen or shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 5P for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 5Q for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the 4th symbol is realized by continuing to turn on and off the 4th symbol display areas 5P and 5Q at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5P for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5Q for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A, it is displayed in a display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth special symbol display area 5P for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss). The For example, when it is lost, it is displayed in blue, whereas when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot (whether it is probable jackpot or normal jackpot). Also, the display color may be different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win a big winning opening, and if it is possible to control multiple types of big hits with different numbers of rounds, The display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the game. Even if the number of rounds per jackpot is the same, for example, the jackpot opening time per round is short (for example, 1 second), and a jackpot that cannot be expected to win a game ball in the jackpot. If the opening time of the big prize opening per round is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big prize opening substantially, to the big prize opening substantially The display color may be varied depending on whether or not a game ball can be expected to win. In addition, for example, when there is a big hit that cannot be expected and a big hit that cannot be expected due to the difference in the number of times the big winning opening is opened per round, The display color may be varied depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win the mouth.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 4B, it is displayed in a display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 5Q for the second special symbol (a display color different from the loss). The For example, when it is lost, it is displayed in blue, whereas when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot (whether it is probable jackpot or normal jackpot). Also, the display color may be different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win a big winning opening, and if it is possible to control multiple types of big hits with different numbers of rounds, The display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the game. Even if the number of rounds per jackpot is the same, for example, the jackpot opening time per round is short (for example, 1 second), and a jackpot that cannot be expected to win a game ball in the jackpot. If the opening time of the big prize opening per round is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big prize opening substantially, to the big prize opening substantially The display color may be varied depending on whether or not a game ball can be expected to win. In addition, for example, when there is a big hit that cannot be expected and a big hit that cannot be expected due to the difference in the number of times the big winning opening is opened per round, The display color may be varied depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win the mouth.

  The display colors when the fourth symbol display areas 5P and 5Q are turned off are different from the background image (for example, black) in order to prevent the display colors from being assimilated with the background image when the lights are turned off. It is desirable to be.

  In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the example in which the fourth symbol is displayed by providing the fourth symbol display region in a part of the display region of the effect display device 5 has been described. You may make it display a 4th symbol using. For example, the variation (variable display) of the 4th symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and which of the two LEDs has been stopped and displayed. May represent whether or not the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Moreover, although the example provided with separate 4th symbol display area 5P and 5Q corresponding to each of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol was explained, it is common to 1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol The fourth symbol display area may be provided in a part of the display area of the effect display device 5. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the right side of the effect display device 5, a first special symbol display 4A that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the first special symbol display 4 </ b> A is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) that can variably display numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 4A is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 5 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 4A), a second special symbol display 4B that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information is also provided. The second special symbol display 4B is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 4B is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In the present embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  The first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 4A and the second special symbol indicator 4B may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  In addition, although the example in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes two special symbol displays is shown, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include only one special symbol display.

  In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has a first start winning opening (first start opening) 28A. Or after passing through the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 28B (including winning), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the first special symbol and The second special symbol variable display is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed) is started, and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result ( The stop symbol is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A having a first start winning opening 28A is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 28A is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the first start opening switch 22A.

  Also, below the ordinary winning ball device 6A, an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B having a second start winning port 28B through which a game ball can be won is provided. The game ball won in the second start winning opening 28B is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the second start opening switch 22B. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened by a solenoid 81. When the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 28B (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 28B than the first starting winning port 28A. Further, in a state where the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 28B. Accordingly, in a state where the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 28A than the second starting winning port 28B. It should be noted that, in a state where the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the closed state, it is difficult to win, but it may be possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win).

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 28A and the second start winning opening 28B may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is very likely to win the second start winning opening 28B. The first start winning opening 28A is provided immediately below the effect display device 5, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 5 and the first start winning port 28A is further reduced, or the first start winning port is set. It is difficult to guide the game balls to the first start winning opening 28A by arranging the nails densely around the 28A, or the nail arrangement around the first starting winning opening 28A. The direction may be made higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 28A.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 1, the normal variable winning ball device 6B that opens and closes only the second starting winning port 28B is provided. However, the first starting winning port 28A and the second starting winning port are provided. Any of 28B may be provided with an ordinary variable winning ball apparatus that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Above the second special symbol display 4B, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 28B, that is, the second reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) 4 is displayed. A second special symbol storage memory display (second storage display) 25B composed of two displays is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 25B increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 4B is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 25B, the first special symbol hold composed of four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls entered into the first start winning opening 28A, that is, the first reserved memory number. A storage indicator (first hold indicator) 25A is provided. The first special symbol storage memory display 25A increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display 4A is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Moreover, in the lower part of the display area of the effect display device 5, a first hold display section (first hold storage display section) 5HL for displaying the first hold memory number and a second hold display for displaying the second hold memory number. Part (second reserved storage display part) 5HR. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  The effect display device 5 performs variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 4B. Do. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 5 are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 5 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 4B, the effect display device 5 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes an opening / closing plate, and is specified when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 4B. Controlled to gaming state. The specific display result is a predetermined display result, for example, a jackpot symbol. The specific game state is to change the variable winning means that can be changed between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state unfavorable to the player to the first state, for example, an open state and a closed state. There is a big hit game state in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 that can be changed is opened. For example, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the specific display result, the big hit game state is controlled as the specific game state. In each specific game state, the open / closed version that is in the closed state is controlled to be in the open state by the solenoid 82, so that the large winning opening that becomes the winning area is in the open state. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 5, a normal symbol display 20 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 1, the normal symbol display 20 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 20 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. Note that the normal symbol display 20 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. Further, the normal symbol display 20 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, variable display of the normal symbol display 20 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 20 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is such that when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the player can win a game ball from the disadvantageous state to the player (a state where the game ball can win the second start winning port 28B). ). In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 20, there is provided a normal symbol hold memory display (ordinary hold display) 25C having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls passed through the passing gate 41. Every time there is a game ball passing through the passing gate 41, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol holding storage display 25C increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 20 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 20 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B may shift to a high base state in which the opening time and the number of times of opening are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 2, there is an out port 26 through which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. Further, four speakers 8 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper and lower left and outer sides of the game area 2A. A frame LED (game effect lamp) 9 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 2A.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a ball striking operation handle and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch a game ball to the game area 2A. Z). The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 2A through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 2A, and then descends the game area 2A. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 28A and is detected by the first start port switch 22A, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 1), the first special symbol display 4A starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol and the effect display device 5 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 28A. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 28B and is detected by the second start port switch 22B, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 4B starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 5 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 28B. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the 15R probability variation big hit or the 4R probability variation big hit is reached, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball becomes easy to start and win (that is, the special symbol indicators 4A and 4B and effects). The display device 5 shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition on the display device 5 is easily established. In the case of the high base state, for example, compared with the case of not being in the high base state, the frequency with which the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state is increased, or the time in which the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state Will be extended, making it easier to start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display device 20 shifts to the normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 20 is a hit symbol is increased. By doing so, you may shift to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 20 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 20 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B are increased, and a state in which a start winning is easily made (high base state) is obtained. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probable symbol, which is disadvantageous for the player. To an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 20 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is won increases, the frequency that the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the open state increases, and it becomes easy to start a winning (high base state).

  In addition, by changing to the short time state (special symbol short time state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and staging symbols is shortened, the variation time of special symbols and staging symbols is shortened. The frequency at which the production symbol changes is increased (in other words, the reserved memory is quickly digested), and the situation in which an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 11. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 12, and the like. A game control microcomputer 100 (corresponding to game control means) 100 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 11. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a ROM 101 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 102 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 103 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O (I / O). O port portion) 105. In this embodiment, the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 are built in the game control microcomputer 100. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may include at least the RAM 103 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O 105 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 100 further incorporates a random number circuit 104 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 102 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 102 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 101. Therefore, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 100 (or CPU 103) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 11.

  The random number circuit 104 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 104 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 104 selects and sets a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit selection selection function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 101 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 100). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 104 can be further improved.

  In addition, an input driver circuit (switch circuit) 110 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 100 is also mounted on the main board 11. Has been. In addition, an output circuit (solenoid circuit) that drives a solenoid 81 for opening and closing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a solenoid 82 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 that forms a large winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 100. ) 111 is also mounted on the main board 11.

  The game control microcomputer 100 also includes a first special symbol display 4A, a second special symbol display 4B that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 20 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control is performed on the display 25A, the second special symbol storage memory display 25B, and the normal symbol storage memory display 25C.

  An information output circuit 64 for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 11.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control means (comprising the effect control microcomputer 90) mounted on the effect control board 12 instructs the contents of the effect from the game control microcomputer 100 via the relay board 15. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 5 that variably displays effect symbols is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 12 controls the display of the frame LED 9 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board (lamp control board) 14 and also outputs the sound output board (voice). The sound output from the speaker 8 is controlled via the control board 13.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 15, the effect control board 12, the audio output board 13, and the lamp driver board 14. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the audio output board 13 and the lamp driver board 14 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the audio output board 13 and the lamp driver board 14, only the effect control board 12 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 12 has an effect control CPU 90 and an effect control microcomputer 90 including a RAM that stores information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 90 is not backed up. In the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 11 input via the relay board 15 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 125A and the input port 125B. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 5 based on the effect control command.

  In the present embodiment, a VDP 109 that controls display of the effect display device 5 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 90 is mounted on the effect control board 12. The VDP 109 has an address space independent from the effect control microcomputer 90, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 5 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM (not shown) to the VDP 109 in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 5, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads out image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 120. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 125A on the effect control board 12. The input driver 125A passes the signal input from the relay board 15 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 12 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal input from the main board 11 is allowed to pass through the relay board 15 only in the direction toward the effect control board 12 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15). The unidirectional circuit 15A is mounted. As the unidirectional circuit 15A, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the production control command and the production control INT signal are output from the main board 11 via the output port 105A which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 15 to the inside of the main board 11 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 15 does not enter the inside of the main board 11 (on the game control microcomputer 100 side). The output port 105A is a part of the I / O 105 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be provided outside the output port 105A (on the relay board 15 side).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 74 of the stick controller 31A has been detected from the trigger sensor 75 via the input port 125E. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 31B has been detected from the push sensor 35B via the input port 125F. Further, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 76 via the input port 125G. . Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 77 via the output port 125D, thereby causing the stick controller 31A to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 14 via the output port 125D. In addition, the production control CPU 120 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 13 via the output port 125C.

  In the lamp driver board 14, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 142 via the input driver 141. The LED driver 142 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 9 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 13, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 133 via the input driver 132. The voice synthesizing IC 133 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs the voice or sound effect to the amplifier circuit 135. The amplifier circuit 135 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 133 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 136 to the speaker 8. The audio data ROM 134 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design). The voice synthesis IC 133 generates a voice and outputs it to the speaker 8 when a predetermined request is received from the effect control board 12.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine and the reset signal to the gaming control microcomputer 100 becoming high level. It is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 103 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S5). By the processing in step S5, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 100 used in this embodiment also includes an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 in an accessible state (step S6), and proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  Note that a software delay process for delaying the start timing of the game device control process (game control process) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board 11) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). Note that the CPU 103 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is an off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, processing for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 103 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 103 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 103 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 103 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as a checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is stopped is stopped. Run.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 103 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 102) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), This is a portion where data indicating the number of payout prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 103 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S43). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a winning ball flag, a ball-out flag, and the like are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set in a flag for performing the above.

  Further, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As the initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 5, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Further, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 104 (step S15).

  Then, the CPU 103 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) ( Step S16). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the setting of the timer interrupt is completed, the CPU 103 first disables the interrupt (step S17), and executes the initial value random number update process (step S18a) and the display random number update process (step S18b). The interrupt is permitted again (step S19). That is, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, and interrupts enable state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are finished. To.

  The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot symbol determining random number for determining a special symbol for generating a jackpot or whether to shift the gaming state to a probable state) Initial value of the count value such as a counter (determination random number generation counter) for generating a probability variation determining random number for generating, a normal random number for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol It is a random number for determining the value. Game control processing described later (a game control microcomputer 100 controls itself for game devices such as the effect display device 5, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the ball payout device 97, etc. provided in the gaming machine. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game machine control process), when the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round, an initial value is set in the counter.

  The display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol indicators 4A and 4B. In this embodiment, as the display random number, a variation pattern determining random number for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, or a reach determination random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated is used. It is done. The display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

  In addition, when the display random number update process is executed, the interrupt disabled state is executed by the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process also in the timer interrupt process described later (that is, the timer This is because the same process is executed in steps S26 and S27 of the interrupt process), so as to avoid conflict with the process in the timer interrupt process. That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of steps S18a and S18b and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of values may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the processing of steps S18a and S18b.

  Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. During execution of the main process, specifically, when a timer interrupt occurs during a period in which the interrupt is permitted during the execution of the loop process of steps S17 to S19, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 A timer interrupt process that is activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt is executed. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-on signal is turned on) (step S20). Then, the CPU 103 inputs detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B and the count switch 23 via the input driver circuit 110, and detects the input of each switch. (Switching process: Step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes display control processing for performing display control of the special symbol displays 4A and 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the special symbol hold storage display 25A and 25B, and the normal symbol hold storage display 25C (step). S22). For the special symbol displays 4A and 4B and the normal symbol display 20, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S36 and S37.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning notification process for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning in the special winning opening and notifying the abnormality (step S24).

  After step S24, the CPU 103 performs processing for updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control (determination random number update processing: step S25). ). Further, the CPU 103 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S26). Further, the CPU 103 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S27).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs special symbol process processing (step S28). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S29). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 20 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol to the effect control microcomputer 90 (effect symbol command control process: step S30). It should be noted that the fact that the variation of the effect symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs information output processing for outputting data such as a start port signal supplied to the hall management computer, a symbol determination number 1 signal, a symbol determination number 2 signal, a jackpot 1 to 3 signal, a time reduction signal, and the like. (Step S31).

  Further, the CPU 103 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 (step S32). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (step S33). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 103 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 0 to the output port. (Step S34: Output processing). Then, the CPU 103 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of reserved storage (step S35).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data in accordance with the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S36). Further, the CPU 103 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S37).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs a status display lamp display process for setting status display control data for displaying each status display lamp in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S38). In this case, when the gaming state is also controlled to a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state), the state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp indicating the high probability state is set in the output buffer. You may make it do.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S39), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S39 (excluding steps S31 and 33) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed in the main process. It may be executed.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B and the effect display device 5, the effect symbol variable display state is started after the effect symbol variable display is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) when the variable display result is a losing symbol.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B and the effect display device 5, the effect symbol variable display state is started after the effect symbol variable display is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in the effect display device 5.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 6, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used when the reach is not performed and is accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Further, the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-2 used when not reaching is a variation pattern for shortening variation, and the variation time of the effect design is shortened to a short time (3.0 seconds in this example). . Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation is to temporarily execute the variable display of the effect symbol after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is lost until the display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2-3 to normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol. -4, fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4 and Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4 are prepared.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 6, when using normal PB2-3 among the fluctuation patterns accompanied with the effect of a pseudo-continuous, re-change is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-continuations, the variation time is 32. In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR2): Determines the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit, which will be described later, 4R probability variation big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2: Determines the type (classification) of the variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR5): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5: Random 4 initial value is determined (for determining random 4 initial value)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined by using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then determined by using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). The variation pattern included in the type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In step S25 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 100 uses a counter for generating (1) the big hit type determination random number and (4) the normal symbol determination random number. Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 100 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 100) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random R (MR1) is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (that is, a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, it is decided to make a big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, which will be described later) for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to win a jackpot means determining whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is used. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131 a and 131 b stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 8B determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 28A (that is, when the first special symbol variation display is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. Further, FIG. 8C shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 28B (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is set to “15R probability variable big hit”, It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of “4R probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, 10 determination values are assigned to “15R probability variation big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). On the other hand, in the jackpot type determination table 131b, 30 determination values are assigned to “15R probability variable big hit” (at a ratio of 30/40). The case where it is determined that the 15R probability variation big hit will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, the start winning prize is given to the second start winning port 28B and the second special symbol change is performed, compared to the case where the first winning symbol 28A is started and the first special symbol change display is executed. When the display is executed, the ratio determined as “15R probability variation big hit” is higher.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, there are “15R probability variation big hit” and “4R probability variation big hit” as the big hit types. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types of 15 rounds and 4 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is the one shown in this embodiment. It cannot be caught. For example, there may be provided a 10R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 10 round jackpot game, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 7 round jackpot game, and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 5 round jackpot game. In this embodiment, there are two types of jackpot types, “15R probability variation big hit” and “4R probability variation big hit”, but not only two types, for example, three or more types of jackpot types are provided. It may be. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than two types, for example, only one type may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “15R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the big round gaming state of 15 rounds, and shifts to the probability changed state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the game is shifted to the probability changed state and the time shortened state is also entered. Will be migrated.) Then, until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), the probability variation state and the time reduction state are continued. Hereinafter, the gaming state controlled to the probability variation state and the short time state may be referred to as “high probability high base state”, and the state that is not controlled to either the probability variation state or the short time state may be referred to as “low probability low base state”. .

  The “4R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a four-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the probability changed state after the big hit gaming state is finished. Will be migrated.) Then, until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), the probability variation state and the time reduction state are continued.

  In the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, numerical values to be compared with a random value of 1, and determination values (big hit type determination values) corresponding to each of “15R probability variation big hit” and “4R probability variation big hit” are set. ing. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matching jackpot type determination value.

  9 and 10 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 5 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 5 controls the effect display device 5 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit. The effect control microcomputer 90 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 90 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 to A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying a fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of a big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In the present embodiment, either the big hit start 1 designation command or the big hit start 2 designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, if it is “15R probability variation big hit”, the big hit start 1 designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and if it is “4R probability variation big hit”, the big hit start 2 designation command (A002 (H)) ) Is used.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a special winning opening) indicating a display of the number of times (round) indicated by XX while the special winning opening is open. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round.

  The commands A301 (H) and A302 (H) display a jackpot end screen, that is, an effect control command for specifying the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command, a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending) 2 designation command). The big hit end 1 designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “15R probability variable big hit” is ended. The big hit end 2 designation command (A302 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “4R probability variable big hit” is ended.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the probability change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  The effect control microcomputer 90 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 11. Then, the display state of the effect display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 13. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 100 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 90.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the production control command, production control command data is output from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 15 by 1 byte by 8 parallel signal lines of the production control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 90 mounted on the effect control board 12 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the change pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (change) of the effect symbol corresponding to the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol. An effect display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 4B, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the production components such as the device 5, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the production control microcomputer 90 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 103 detects that the game ball has won the first start port switch 22A for detecting that the game ball has won the first start prize port 28A or the second start winning port 28B. If the second start opening switch 22B is turned on, that is, if the start winning to the first start winning opening 28A or the start winning to the second start winning opening 28B has occurred, the start opening switch passing process is performed. Execute (Steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed. If the first start port switch 22A or the second start port switch 22B is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 100 is in a state where variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 100 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 90 confirms the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 90 controls the effect display device 5 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 as described later. Is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the set contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 82 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 90, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 90 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Further, a process for setting a flag (for example, a probability variation flag) indicating a gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in an ON state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S1217. If the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1217.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1213) and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Next, the CPU 103 extracts a value from the random number circuit 104 or a counter for generating a software random number, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 13) (step S1215). . In the process of step S1215, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are not extracted and stored in advance in the storage area in the start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning). You may make it extract at the time of the change start of 1 special symbol. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern type determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) in a variation pattern setting process to be described later, A value may be directly extracted from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a determination random number (random 3).

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 13, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In the present embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern. A random number for type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90 (step S1216).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (step S1217). If the second start port switch 22B is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step S1218). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1219), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1220). Next, the CPU 103 extracts a value from the random number circuit 104 or a counter for generating a software random number, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 13) (step S1221). . In the process of step S1221, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90 (step S1222).

  14 and 15 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (step S60). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 90 (step S61), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 103 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step 61, the CPU 103 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step S62). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating "second" (step S63). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S64).

  In the present embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S62 to S64, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step S65). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 determines each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S66). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S67). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90 according to the current gaming state (step S68). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating that the probability variation state is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. Further, if the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  In the present embodiment, the background designation command is transmitted every time for each variation. For example, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has changed since the previous variation at the start of the variation. The background designation command corresponding to the game state after the change may be transmitted only when is changed. With such a configuration, the number of transmissions of the background designation command can be reduced, and the processing burden on the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

  Specifically, when the CPU 103 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90, the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is given. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect symbol command control process (step S30). In the present embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the effect control microcomputer 90 in the order of the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved memory count subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. Will be sent to. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage count subtraction designation command is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 90.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 28A, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 28B. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S307 can be shared between the case where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random number extracted in steps S1215 and S1221 of the start port switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state). Specifically, a probability change jackpot determination table (a table in which the value on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 101 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 101 is set) set to be smaller than the big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state, and when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 103 determines to win the special symbol. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S69), the process proceeds to step S70. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. There is also.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be 15R probability variation big hit or 4R probability variation big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. When the big hit is decided, the special symbol variation display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped. Is reset at a timing to end or 50 times of special symbol variation display.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S69), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S74 as it is.

  In step S70, the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S71). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8B. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8C.

  Next, the CPU 103 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area (“15R probability variation big hit”, “ 4R probability variation big hit ") is determined as the type of big hit (step S72). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot type determination random numbers extracted in steps S1215 and S1221 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer and the second hold memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. .

  Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S73). For example, when the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “4R positive variable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. Is done.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S74). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, “−” which is a lost symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of the big hit symbols is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when “15R probability variation big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “4R probability variation big hit” is determined, “3” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to what was shown in the example. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S75).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S80). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 determines which of the big hit variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the big hit type. Is selected (step S81). Then, the process proceeds to step S87.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step S82). The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be 15R probability variation big hit or 4R probability variation big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. When the big hit is decided, the special symbol variation display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped. Is reset at the timing of ending or 50 variable display ends. If the probability variation flag is set (Y in Step S82), the CPU 103 uses a variation pattern type determination table for loss for probability variation as a table used to determine any one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Select (step S86). Then, the process proceeds to step S87.

  If the probability variation flag is not set (N in Step S82), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Step S83). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S83), the CPU 103 uses a normal variation pattern type determination table for losing as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Is selected (step S84). Then, the process proceeds to step S87.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S83), the CPU 103 uses as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types, for loss at the time of variation time reduction. A variation pattern type determination table is selected (step S85). Then, the process proceeds to step S87.

  In the present embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S82 to S85, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the lost variation pattern type determination table for reducing the variation time is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the probability variation variation pattern type determination table is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S87 described later, and when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S88. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state, or when the total number of pending storage is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation may be performed.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storages are different tables. A common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for use.

  Even if the gaming state is a probable change state, if the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1), a change display of a shortened change is performed. It may not be possible. In this case, for example, when the CPU 103 determines Y in step S82, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. A determination table may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and selects the table selected in step S81, S84, S85 or S86. By referencing, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S87). In the case where the random number 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning prize, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern type for generating the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2). A value may be directly extracted from the random number counter for use, and the variation pattern type may be determined based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot variation pattern determination table and the loss variation pattern determination table as tables used to determine one of the plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S87. One of them is selected (step S88). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S88. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S89). If the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 90 (step S90). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90 (step S91).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S92). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S93).

  In the case where it is determined to be lost, the variation pattern type may not be suddenly determined, but first, whether or not to reach may be determined by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S82 to S85 and S86 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission processing, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit any effect control command (see FIG. 9) of display result 1 designation to display result 3 designation in accordance with the determined jackpot type and loss. Do. Specifically, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S94). When the big hit flag is set (Y in step S94), when the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S95 and S96). Whether or not it is “15R probability variable big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S73 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “4R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S95 and S97). Whether or not it is “4R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S73 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set (N in step S94), that is, if it is a loss, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S98).

  Subsequent to step S96, S97 or S98, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S99).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state if it is set (step S132).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a 15R probability variable jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. When the jackpot type is 4R probability variation jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. Whether the jackpot type is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 102 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

  In addition, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying that the jackpot has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 5) in the timer before opening the big prize opening (step S134). Note that the pre-winner pre-opening timer is a timer for measuring the time until the big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. Specifically, at the start of the big hit game, in step S134, the time required from the time when the variable display is stopped until the first round is started (the variable display is stopped on the effect control microcomputer 90 side and the jackpot symbol is displayed). The time before the first round is started until the start of the first round is set as the pre-opening timer. For the first and subsequent rounds, the interval time between the rounds (the device for performing the interval effect between the rounds on the effect control microcomputer 90 side) is set as the timer before opening the big prize opening.

  Further, the CPU 103 sets the number of releases corresponding to the jackpot type in the number-of-release counter (step S135). For example, 15 times is set in the open count counter for 15R probability variation big hit, and 4 times is set for 4R probability variation big hit.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S137).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step S141). If it is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state, step 103 is executed. The process proceeds to S150. When the probability variation flag is set, that is, when the probability variation state is set, the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S142), and it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is 0 (step S143). . If not 0, the process proceeds to step S150. If it becomes 0, the probability variation flag is reset (step S144), and the process proceeds to step S150. As a result, the state is changed from the certain change state to the normal state when triggered by a predetermined number of times (50 times). In step S150, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S180). If the jackpot end display timer is not set (N in step S180), the jackpot flag is reset. (Step S181), control to transmit a jackpot end designation command is performed (Step S182). In the process of step S182, a big hit end 1 designation command is transmitted if it is a 15R probability variation big hit, and a big hit end 2 designation command is transmitted if it is a 4R certain variation big hit. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 5 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S183), and the processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is set (Y in step S180), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step S184). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S185). If it has not passed (N of step S185), a process is complete | finished.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S185), the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag and shifts the gaming state to the probability change state (step S186). Then, “50” is set in the probability variation counter (step S187), and the process proceeds to step S188.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S188).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S36) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the special symbol changing process is being executed) (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol changing process is being executed), the CPU 103 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 103 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable symbol special display. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 4A and 4B according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 4A and 4B is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203). ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop process is started), the CPU 103 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal process. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 103 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 4A and 4B according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 4A and 4B. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 100 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 90 side, the display result designation command transmission processing also varies. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. At the same time, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 103 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 90 (specifically, effect control CPU 120) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the start interval (eg, 4 ms) of effect control (step S751). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S752). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (step S753) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S754).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (step S755). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the fourth symbol process (step S756). In the 4th symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 5P and 5Q of the effect display device 5 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  After step S756, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S757). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S752.

  FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 9 and 10) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  23 and 24 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis processing (step S754). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 120 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 10 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618A).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been normally received.

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S622). In this embodiment, the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag and the jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag set in step S622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S679), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 5 to a background screen (for example, a blue display color). Background screen) (step S680).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S682), the effect control CPU 120 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 5 as a background screen (for example, a red display). Color background screen) (step S683).

  If the received production control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S685), the production control CPU 120 controls to display the customer waiting demonstration screen on the production display device 5 after 30 seconds (step S687). . Specifically, a timer for measuring 30 seconds is set, and when the timer times out, a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device 5. If a variation pattern command or the like is received during measurement, the timer is reset and the measurement ends. After step S687, the number of reserved memories stored in each reserved memory number storage area is cleared (step S688).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 120 sets a flag according to the received effect control command or executes a process (step S691). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S755) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 performs a first operation reception process related to the first operation effect (step S800A), and performs a second operation reception process related to the second operation effect (step S800B).

  The first operation effect is an effect that is performed immediately before the end of the change in Super Reach A, and is specified when a predetermined condition (detecting an operation on the push button 31B 10 times) is satisfied during the first effective period. This is an effect that can be performed. Note that the first specific effect is an effect that can be executed only in a variation that results in a big hit, and is an effect that informs the player that the game will be a big hit. That is, the first specific effect is not performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the loss variation. Specifically, the first specific effect is a cut-in effect for displaying the character A. In the first operation effect, the first effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the first effective period, the first number gauge based on the number of times the operation on the push button 31B is detected in the first effective period, and the push button 31B. The first operation promotion image that prompts the user to perform an operation is displayed on the effect display device 5 (see FIG. 37).

  The first effective period gauge has the remaining time of the first effective period from the start mode (the state of being painted white) indicating that the remaining time of the first effective period has not decreased (start of the first effective period). Gradually changes according to the remaining time of the first effective period (the white filled area is changed to the end mode (the state in which the first effective period is ended) indicating that the value is “0” (end of the first effective period) It decreases from the right side).

  The first number gauge is divided into a plurality of areas, and is increased (stored) step by step for each area each time an operation on the push button 31B is detected. Specifically, the first count gauge is stored when the first operation is detected during the first effective period, and when the second operation is detected during the first effective period. The second area is divided into tenth areas that can be stored when the tenth operation is detected during the first effective period. However, when the first specific effect is not executed, the area up to the tenth area is not stored. That is, when the first number gauge is stored up to the tenth region, the first specific effect is executed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit.

  As a display mode of the first operation promotion image, a first display mode having a small display range and a second display mode having a display range larger than the first display mode are provided. Specifically, the range that can be taken by the painted area of the first effective period gauge is divided into two equal parts, and when the first effective period gauge points within the first range close to the start mode, the first display mode The operation promotion image is displayed, and when the first effective period gauge points within the second range close to the end mode, the operation promotion image is displayed in the second display mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern of the first operation effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “first operation effect pattern”), patterns A1 and A3 in which a change in the first effective period gauge is scheduled to stop temporarily, and a pattern that does not stop A2 and A4 are provided. The first effective period in the patterns A1 and A3 is 5 seconds, and the first effective period in the patterns A2 and A4 is 3 seconds (see FIG. 33A). However, in the patterns A1 and A3, when the operation to the push button 31B is not detected until 2 seconds have passed after the first effective period is started, the first effective period is changed to 3 seconds. Is.

  The second operation effect is an effect that is performed immediately before the end of the change in the super reach B, and is specified when a predetermined condition (detecting an operation on the push button 31B 10 times) is satisfied during the second effective period. This is an effect that can be performed. Note that the second specific effect is an effect that can be executed only in a variation that results in a big hit, and is an effect that informs the player that the game will be a big hit. That is, the second specific effect is not performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the loss variation. Specifically, the second specific effect is a cut-in effect for displaying the character B. In the second operation effect, the second effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the second effective period, the second number gauge based on the number of times the operation on the push button 31B is detected in the second effective period, and the push button 31B A second operation promotion image that prompts the user to perform an operation is displayed on the effect display device 5 (see FIG. 38).

  The second effective period gauge has a remaining time of the second effective period from a start mode (a state in which it is painted white) indicating that the remaining time of the second effective period has not decreased (start of the second effective period). Indicates that the value is “0” (end of the second effective period) (including the first end mode (state painted in red) and the second end mode (state painted in black)) Gradually changes according to the remaining time of the second effective period (the white filled area or the red filled area decreases from the right side).

  The second number gauge is divided into a plurality of areas, and is increased (stored) step by step by one area each time an operation on the push button 31B is detected. Specifically, the second count gauge is stored when the first operation is detected during the second effective period, and when the second operation is detected during the second effective period. The second area is divided into tenth areas that can be stored when the tenth operation is detected during the second effective period. However, when the second specific effect is not executed, the area up to the tenth area is not stored. That is, when the second number gauge is stored up to the tenth region, the second specific effect is executed, and it is notified that the big hit is made.

  As a display mode of the second operation promotion image, a single display mode is provided. As with the first operation promotion image, a plurality of display modes having different display ranges are provided. Also good. Moreover, it is good also as displaying a 2nd operation promotion image in either display mode among several display modes based on the range which a 2nd effective period gauge points.

  In addition, as an effect pattern of the second operation effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “second operation effect pattern”), the second operation effect gauge changes from the start mode to the first end mode. The end of the second operation effect is made by changing to the second end mode after passing through the common mode (the state painted in red) common to the first end mode from the pattern B2 and B4 for informing the end. The patterns B1 and B3 to be notified (that is, the second operation effect pattern that makes it appear as if the second effective period is extended by once again displaying the common mode common to the first end mode). Is provided. The second effective period in the patterns B1 and B3 is 5 seconds, and the second effective period in the patterns B2 and B4 is 3 seconds (see FIG. 33B). In addition, when changing from the start mode to the first end mode or the common mode, the white painted area decreases from the right side and the red painted area is exposed, and the common mode shifts to the second end mode. In the case of a change, the red filled area decreases from the right side and the black filled area is exposed.

  Hereinafter, the first operation effect and the second operation effect may be collectively referred to as “operation effects”.

  After step S800B, any one of steps S800 to S807 is performed according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 5 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbols is realized. However, control relating to variable display of the effect symbols synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to either the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception wait process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): When the big hit is reached, after the variation time is over, the effect display device 5 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. For example, when a fanfare designation command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, if a display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, the display control of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (closed), an interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. For example, when an ending designation command for designating the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  26 and 27 are flowcharts showing the first operation reception process. In the first operation reception process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first valid period flag indicating that the first valid period is being set (step S2601). The first operation acceptance process is terminated as it is. If it is set, that is, if it is during the first effective period, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first effective period timer (step S2602).

  Thereafter, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not a scheduled stop flag indicating that the change in the first effective period gauge is scheduled to be stopped is set (step S2603). The process proceeds to step S2610. If set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a stoppage flag indicating that the change of the first effective period gauge is stopped is set (step S2604), and if not set Is determined whether or not the first validity period timer has a value corresponding to 3 seconds (that is, whether or not the remaining time of the first validity period is 3 seconds) (step S2605). If it is not a corresponding value, the process proceeds to step S2610.

  In step S2605, if the first effective period timer has a value corresponding to 3 seconds, that is, if the remaining time of the first effective period is 3 seconds, the effect control CPU 120 uses the push button 31B in the first operation effect. It is determined whether or not the number of times P detected is “1” or more (that is, whether or not the push button 31B has been operated once or more during the first effective period) (step S2606). . When the number of times P is “1” or more, that is, when the operation on the push button 31B is performed once or more during the first effective period, the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop flag (step S2607). ), A stop notification display for notifying that the change in the first effective period gauge has stopped is started (step S2608), and the process proceeds to step S2611.

  In step S2606, when the number P is not “1” or more, that is, when the push button 31B is not operated once during the first effective period, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first effective period timer. A value corresponding to 1 second is set (step S2609A), the scheduled stop flag is reset (step S2609B), and the process proceeds to step S2610.

  In step S2610, the production control CPU 120 displays (changes) a reduced area of the first effective period gauge (step S2610), and displays a first operation promotion image corresponding to the display mode of the first effective period gauge. (Step S2611). Specifically, in step S2611, if the first effective period gauge indicates the first range, the operation promotion image is displayed in the first display mode, and the first effective period gauge indicates the second range. When pointing, the operation promotion image is displayed in the second display mode.

  If the stop flag is set in step S2604, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first effective period timer has a value corresponding to 1 second (step S2612). If it is not a corresponding value, the process proceeds to step S2611. If it is a value corresponding to 1 second, the stoppage flag and the planned stoppage flag are reset (steps S2613 and S2614), the stop notification display is ended (step S2615), and the process proceeds to step S2610.

  As described above, the first effective period gauge is changed by performing step S2610. However, in the pattern in which the change is temporarily stopped, when the remaining time of the first effective period is 3 seconds, the push button 31B is selected. If one or more operations are detected, the first effective period gauge is not changed by not executing step S2610 (see Y to S2608 in step S2606). In that case, by performing steps S2612 to S2615, when the remaining time of the first effective period becomes 1 second, the change of the first effective period gauge is resumed.

  Further, even when the first operation effect pattern is the patterns A1 and A3, the push button 31B is not operated once until the remaining time of the first effective period becomes 3 seconds (N in step S2606). The steps S2609A and S2609B are performed (the remaining time of the first effective period is reduced from 3 seconds to 1 second, and the stop schedule flag is reset) without stopping the change of the first effective period gauge. The patterns A2 and A4 exhibit the same behavior.

  After step S2611, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the first effective period timer is “0”, that is, whether or not the first effective period has ended (step S2616). ", I.e., when the first valid period is over, the process proceeds to step S2623. When the value of the first effective period timer is not “0”, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an operation to the push button 31B has been detected (step S2617). The operation acceptance process is terminated.

  When the operation on the push button 31B is detected, the effect control CPU 120 adds “1” to the number of times P (step S2618), and displays the first number gauge according to the number of times P (step S2619). Specifically, the first count gauge is stored and displayed up to the area corresponding to the count P. At this time, when the number P is “10”, the first number gauge is stored and displayed up to the maximum water level (tenth region) if any of the patterns A1 and A2, while any of the patterns A3 and A4 is displayed. If so, the first count gauge is not stored and displayed until the maximum water level (10th region) (that is, it is not changed from the 9th region).

  In the present embodiment, when the first operation effect pattern is the patterns A3 and A4, the first number gauge can be stored up to the ninth area immediately before the maximum water level (tenth area). However, it is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as determining the water level (for example, any one of the 1st field-the 9th field) of the stage in which the 1st number gauge can be stored by lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the display of the first number gauge always changes when an operation on the push button 31B is detected, except for the case where the number P is “10” in any of the patterns A3 and A4 ( However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined by lottery whether or not the display of the first number gauge changes every time an operation to the push button 31B is detected, and the display of the first number gauge can be changed based on the lottery result. Good.

  If the number of times P is “10” (Y in step S2620), it is determined whether the effect pattern in the first operation effect being executed is any one of the patterns A1 and A2 (step S2621). . If the effect pattern in the first operation effect being executed is not one of the patterns A1 and A2, the process proceeds to step S2623.

  In step S2621, if the effect pattern in the first operation effect being executed is one of patterns A1 and A2, effect control CPU 120 executes the first specific effect (step S2622). As described above, in this embodiment, the first specific effect can be executed when ten operations on the push button 31B are detected during the first effective period.

  Thereafter, the CPU 120 for effect control resets the first valid period flag (step S2623), ends the first operation effect display (step S2624), and resets the predetermined flag (step S2625). Specifically, the scheduled stop flag and the stopped flag that are flags related to the first operation effect are reset. The case where the scheduled stop flag is set in step S2625 is a case where a predetermined condition (the push button 31B is operated 10 times) is satisfied before the stop of the change in the first effective period gauge is finished. . Further, when the stop flag is set in step S2625, a predetermined condition (push button 31B is operated 10 times) before the stop of the change of the first effective period gauge is started and ended. Is the case.

  As described above, the first operation effect is ended when the first effective period ends or when an operation on the push button 31B is detected ten times.

  28 and 29 are flowcharts showing the second operation acceptance process. In the second operation reception process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second effective period flag indicating that the second effective period is being set (step S2801). The second operation acceptance process is terminated as it is. If it is set, that is, if it is during the second effective period, the value of the second effective period timer is decremented by 1 (step S2802).

  Thereafter, the production control CPU 120 plans to change the second effective period gauge to the second end mode, and has already displayed the common mode (that is, after the second effective period has been extended). (Step S2803), and if not set, the effect control CPU 120 displays a reduced white area of the second effective period gauge. (Step S2804). Then, the production control CPU 120 is scheduled to change the second effective period gauge to the second end mode, and has not yet displayed the common mode (that is, before the second effective period is shown to be extended). It is determined whether or not an extension schedule flag indicating that the extension schedule flag is set (step S2805). If the extension schedule flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2809. When the extension schedule flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second effective period timer has a value corresponding to 3 seconds (step S2806), and when it is not a value corresponding to 3 seconds. Shifts to step S2809. If the value corresponds to 3 seconds, the extended flag is reset (step S2807), and the process proceeds to step S2809.

  If the extended flag is set in step S2803, the effect control CPU 120 displays a reduced red area of the second effective period gauge (step S2808), and proceeds to step S2809.

  As described above, by performing steps S2805 to S2808, when the extension schedule flag is set, the white painted area in the second effective period gauge is changed until the remaining time of the second effective period becomes 3 seconds. In addition to displaying a decrease, the red painted area in the second effective period gauge is displayed in a reduced manner after the remaining time of the second effective period reaches 3 seconds.

  In step S2809, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the second effective period timer is “0”, that is, whether or not the second effective period has ended (step S2809), and “0”. If that is the case, that is, if the second valid period has expired, the process proceeds to step S2816. If the value of the second effective period timer is not “0”, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an operation on the push button 31B has been detected (step S2810). The operation acceptance process is terminated.

  When the operation on the push button 31B is detected, the effect control CPU 120 adds “1” to the number of times Q (step S2811), and displays a second number gauge according to the number of times Q (step S2812). Specifically, the second number gauge is stored and displayed up to an area corresponding to the number Q. At this time, if the number of times Q is “10”, the second number gauge is stored and displayed up to the maximum water level (tenth region) if any of the patterns B1 and B2, while any of the patterns B3 and B4 is displayed. If so, the second number gauge is not stored and displayed until the maximum water level (10th region) (that is, it is not changed from the 9th region).

  In the present embodiment, when the second operation effect pattern is the patterns B3 and B4, the second number gauge can be stored up to the ninth area immediately before the maximum water level (tenth area). However, it is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as determining the water level (for example, any one of the 1st field-the 9th field) of the stage in which the 2nd number gauge can be stored by lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the display of the second number gauge always changes when an operation to the push button 31B is detected, except for the case where the number of times Q is “10” in any of patterns B3 and B4 ( However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined by lottery whether or not the display of the second number gauge changes every time an operation on the push button 31B is detected, and the display of the second number gauge can be changed based on the lottery result. Good.

  If the number of times Q is “10” (Y in step S2813), it is determined whether or not the effect pattern in the second operation effect being executed is one of the patterns B1 and B2 (step S2814). . If the effect pattern in the second operation effect being executed is not one of the patterns B1 and B2, the process proceeds to step S2816.

  In step S2814, when the effect pattern in the second operation effect being executed is one of the patterns B1 and B2, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second specific effect (step S2815). As described above, in this embodiment, the second specific effect can be executed when ten operations on the push button 31B are detected during the second effective period.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 resets the second valid period flag (step S2816), ends the second operation effect display (step S2817), and resets the predetermined flag (step S2818). Specifically, the extended schedule flag and the extended flag that are flags related to the second operation effect are reset. The case where the extension schedule flag is set in step S2818 is a case where the second operation effect is executed with any one of the patterns B1 and B3. In addition, the case where the extended flag is set in step S2818 is a case where the second operation effect is executed in any one of the patterns B1 and B3 and the common mode is already displayed.

  As described above, the second operation effect is ended when the second effective period ends or when an operation on the push button 31B is detected ten times.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, by the execution control CPU 120 executing the process of step S8002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If a variation pattern that designates a pseudo-ream is also used and the pseudo-ream is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step S8002, obtains a chance target symbol ( For example, a combination of symbols that are not reachable, such as “223” and “445”, but that is not one reach and one symbol is shifted) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 32, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 120 A combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as the stop symbols is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates “4R probability variation big hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 120 uses 3 symbols as stop symbols. Determines the combination of performance symbols arranged with the same even number of symbols.

  In the case of “losing” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 5 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect setting process for setting the notice effect (step S8003). Here, for example, whether or not the starting change is a big hit, if it is a big hit, which type of big hit, or a predetermined notice effect (for example, reliability for the big hit) Whether or not to perform step-up advancement that develops to a stage corresponding to the player, button effect that switches the effect screen by receiving an operation from the player to the operation member, etc.) is determined.

  Then, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the first operation effect pattern lottery process for determining the first operation effect pattern when the variation pattern for executing the super reach A (Y in step S3910) (step S3910). S3911), the lottery result is stored (step S3912). In step S3911, specifically, the first operation effect pattern lottery process is executed using the first operation effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 33A is an explanatory diagram showing a first operation effect pattern lottery table. In the first operation effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG. 33A, a determination value for each variable display result (big hit, loss) is assigned to the first operation effect pattern. In the example shown, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown to simplify the explanation. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for the first operation effect pattern lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  Note that the pattern A1 is a first operation effect pattern in which a first specific effect is executed when a predetermined condition (detection of 10 operations on the push button 31B) is satisfied during the first effective period of 5 seconds. The pattern A2 is a first operation effect pattern that executes the first specific effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the first effective period of 3 seconds. The pattern A3 is a first operation effect pattern that does not execute the first specific effect even when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the first effective period of 5 seconds. The pattern A4 is a first operation effect pattern that does not execute the first specific effect even when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the first effective period of 3 seconds. Note that, as described above, the patterns A1 and A3 are first operation effect patterns in which the change in the first effective period gauge is scheduled to temporarily stop, and the patterns A2 and A4 are the first in which the change in the first effective period gauge does not stop. It is an operation effect pattern.

  For example, if the variable display result is a big hit, the pattern A1 is 40%, the pattern A2 is 30%, the pattern A3 is 20%, the pattern A4 is 10%, One operation effect pattern is selected.

  For example, when the variable display result is lost, the pattern A3 is selected as the first operation effect pattern at a rate of 30% and the pattern A4 at the rate of 70%.

  As described above, the patterns A1 and A2 that can execute the first specific effect are configured so that they can be selected only when the jackpot is a big hit. Therefore, the patterns A1 and A2 that can be executed only when the first specific effect is a jackpot. It has become. In addition, the patterns A1 and A3 having the first effective period of 5 seconds are more easily selected in the case of the big hit than the patterns A2 and A4 having the first effective period of 3 seconds. The patterns A1 and A3 having the first effective period of 5 seconds have higher reliability with respect to the big hit than the patterns A2 and A4 having the first effective period of 3 seconds. Note that, as described above, the patterns A1 and A3 are performance patterns in which the change in the first effective period gauge is scheduled to temporarily stop. Therefore, when the change of the first effective period gauge is temporarily stopped, the reliability for the big hit is higher than when the change of the first effective period gauge is not stopped.

  After step S3912 or when N in step S3910, the effect control CPU 120 determines the second operation effect pattern when the variation pattern for executing the super reach B (Y in step S3913). A second operation effect pattern lottery process is executed (step S3914), and the lottery result is stored (step S3915). In step S3914, specifically, the second operation effect pattern lottery process is executed using the second operation effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 33B is an explanatory diagram showing a second operation effect pattern lottery table. In the second operation effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG. 33B, a determination value for each variable display result (big hit, loss) is assigned to the second operation effect pattern. In the example shown, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown to simplify the explanation. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for the second operation effect pattern lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  The pattern B1 is a second operation effect pattern in which the second specific effect is executed when a predetermined condition (detection of 10 operations on the push button 31B) is established during the second effective period of 6 seconds. The pattern B2 is a second operation effect pattern that executes the second specific effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the second effective period of 3 seconds. The pattern B3 is a second operation effect pattern that does not execute the second specific effect even when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the second effective period of 6 seconds. The pattern B4 is a second operation effect pattern that does not execute the second specific effect even when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the second effective period of 3 seconds. As described above, the patterns B1 and B3 are the second operation effect patterns that change from the start mode to the second end mode after the common mode common to the first end mode from the start mode. B2 and B4 are second operation effect patterns in which the second effective period gauge changes from the start mode to the first end mode.

  For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the pattern B1 is 70%, the pattern B2 is 15%, the pattern B3 is 10%, the pattern B4 is 5%, The two operation effect patterns are selected.

  Further, for example, when the variable display result is lost, the pattern B3 is selected as the second operation effect pattern at the rate of 30% and the pattern B4 at the rate of 70%.

  As described above, the patterns B1 and B2 that can execute the second specific effect are configured so that they can be selected only in the case of a big hit, so that the second specific effect can be executed only in the case of a big win. It has become. Further, the patterns B1 and B3 having the second effective period of 6 seconds are configured to be selected more easily in the case of the big hit than the patterns B2 and B4 having the second effective period of 3 seconds. The patterns B1 and B3 having the second effective period of 6 seconds have higher reliability for the big hit than the patterns B2 and B4 having the second effective period of 3 seconds. Note that, as described above, the patterns B1 and B3 are performance patterns that are scheduled to change to the second end mode after the second effective period gauge is changed to the common mode. Therefore, the case where the second effective period gauge is changed even after being changed to the common aspect common to the first end aspect is changed to the case where the second effective period is ended while being changed to the first end aspect. It has a high reliability for big hits.

  In addition, when the second operation effect pattern lottery process is executed using the second operation effect pattern lottery table, the second operation effect pattern whose second effective period is 6 seconds is selected. The ratio of executing the specific effect is higher than when the second operation effect pattern having an effective period of 3 seconds is selected. Therefore, the case where the second effective period gauge is changed even after being changed to the common aspect common to the first end aspect is changed to the case where the second effective period is ended while being changed to the first end aspect. It has a high reliability for executing a specific performance.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect when the change pattern and the notice effect are executed (step S8004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data that is referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating the mode of variation constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 5 in addition to the display pattern of the effect symbol) Including the effect patterns other than the effect symbols in the area.). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display area of the effect display device 5 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed in the display area. Control to display. Further, the flashing of the light emitter is controlled in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speaker 8 is controlled.

  The process table shown in FIG. 34 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12. The process table is prepared according to the contents of each variation pattern and notice effect. If it is decided to execute the notice effect in the process of step S8004 or the like, the data corresponding to the notice effect is set, the process table is selected, and it is not decided to execute the notice effect. The process table for which data corresponding to the notice effect is not set is selected.

  Also, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  After step S8005, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (the effect display device 5, the speaker 8, the LED, and the accessory) according to the contents of the process data 1 (step S8006).

  After step S8006, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the first operation effect execution timing for starting execution of the first operation effect (step S3301), and when it is not the first operation effect execution timing. Proceeds to step S3308. In step S3301, specifically, when the variation pattern is for executing the super reach A, it is determined whether or not it is the first operation effect execution timing predetermined for each variation pattern. If it is the first operation effect execution timing, the first effective period flag is set (step S3302), the number P is set to “0” (step S3303), and the first operation effect pattern stored in step S3912 is set. The value (a value corresponding to 5 seconds for patterns A1 and A3, a value corresponding to 3 seconds for patterns A2 and A4) is set in the first effective period timer (step S3304).

  Then, if the first operation effect pattern stored in step S3912 is one of the patterns A1 and A3, the effect control CPU 120 sets a scheduled stop flag (Y in step S3305, S3306), and displays the first operation effect display. Is started (step S3307). Specifically, the first operation effect display is to display a first effective period gauge, a first number gauge, and a first operation promotion image.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the second operation effect execution timing (step S3308), and if it is not the second operation effect execution timing, the process proceeds to step S8101. In step S3308, specifically, when the variation pattern is for executing the super reach B, it is determined whether or not it is the second operation effect execution timing predetermined for each variation pattern. If it is the second operation effect execution timing, the second valid period flag is set (step S3309), the number Q is set to “0” (step S3310), and the second operation effect pattern stored in step S3915 is set. The value (a value corresponding to 6 seconds for the patterns B1 and B3 and a value corresponding to 3 seconds for the patterns B2 and B4) is set in the second effective period timer (step S3311).

  Then, if the second operation effect pattern stored in step S3915 is one of the patterns B1 and B3, the effect control CPU 120 sets the extension schedule flag (Y in step S3312, S3313), and displays the second operation effect display. Is started (step S3314). Specifically, the second operation effect display is to display a second effective period gauge, a second number gauge, and a second operation promotion image.

  Then, the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101), and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8111), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8112).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S861). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S867. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a big hit symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S866. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S868. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S861 is a stage in which the fanfare effect is not yet executed although the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and therefore the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S862 Without moving to step S867.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the stored stop symbol (losing symbol or jackpot symbol) (step S862). The effect control CPU 120 may perform control to stop and display the effect symbol in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbols to be stopped are automatically displayed in the period immediately before executing step S862.

  When the big hit symbol is displayed in step S862 (Y in step S863), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S866) and the fanfare flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag or big hit start 2). It is confirmed whether or not the (specified command reception flag) has been set (step S867). When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S867), the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S868) and selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S869). Then, the process timer is started (step S870).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S871).

  When the big hit symbol is not displayed in step S863 (that is, when the lost symbol is displayed: N in step S863), the effect control CPU 120 resets a predetermined flag (step S864). For example, the effect control CPU 120 resets the command reception flag. The effect control CPU 120 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, immediately after confirming the variation pattern command reception flag, the variation pattern command The reception flag may be reset).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S865).

  Next, a display example in the operation effect will be described. FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example in the first operation effect. FIG. 37 shows a display example of the effect display device 5 at each timing in each first operation effect pattern. Note that the display example illustrated in FIG. 37 illustrates a case where the number of operations detected on the push button 31B is less than 10 during the first effective period. For example, when the first operation effect pattern is the patterns A1 and A3, the first number gauge 371, the first effective period gauge 372, and the operation promotion image 373 are displayed when the first effective period is started. At this time, since the range indicated by the first effective period gauge 371 is the first range, the operation promotion image 373 is displayed in the first display mode.

  Next, as the time passes, the filled area of the first effective period gauge 372 is reduced and displayed, and the operation promotion image 373 is displayed in a display mode based on the range indicated by the first effective period gauge 372. Specifically, the operation promotion image 373 is displayed in the first display mode if the first effective period gauge 372 points within the first range, and in the second display mode if it points within the second range. (The display mode is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first effective period). Further, every time an operation on the push button 31B is detected, the first number gauge 371 changes to a display corresponding to the number P.

  Then, at the time when 2 seconds have passed since the first effective period was started (when the remaining time of the first effective period is 3 seconds (Y in step S2605)), the operation to the push button 31B can be accepted. (Y in step S2606) is a period for stopping the change of the first effective period gauge (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “first effective period gauge change stop period”). The first effective period gauge change stop period starts at a time 2 seconds after the start of the first effective period and ends at a time 4 seconds after the start of the first effective period. When an operation to the push button 31B is detected during the first effective period gauge change stop period, the first number gauge 371 changes to a display corresponding to the number of operations (number of times P), as in other periods. To do. Further, during the first effective period gauge change stop period, a stop notification display 374 such as “continuous hitting plus!” Is performed.

  Then, after the first effective period gauge change stop period ends, the filled area of the first effective period gauge 372 is reduced and displayed as time passes until the first effective period ends. Further, every time an operation on the push button 31B is detected, the first number gauge 371 changes to a display corresponding to the number P.

  Further, for example, when the first operation effect pattern is the patterns A2 and A4, the same as the case where the first operation effect pattern is the patterns A1 and A3 until 2 seconds have passed after the first effective period is started. Shows behavior. Then, even after 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first effective period, the filled area of the first effective period gauge 372 is reduced and displayed over time until the first effective period ends. Further, every time an operation on the push button 31B is detected, the first number gauge 371 changes to a display corresponding to the number P.

  As described above, when the first operation effect of the patterns A1 and A3 is performed, the change of the first effective period gauge 372 stops two seconds after the first effective period is started. Thereby, it can be shown as if the 1st effective period was extended, and the improvement of an interest can be aimed at.

  In addition, when the change in the first effective period gauge 372 is stopped, the stop notification display 374 is performed, so that the player can be informed that the change in the first effective period gauge 372 is stopped due to the occurrence of a malfunction. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding.

  When the first operation effect of the patterns A1 and A3 is performed, the change in the first effective period gauge 372 stops two seconds after the first effective period is started, while the first of the patterns A2 and A4 is stopped. When the operation effect is performed, the change of the first effective period gauge 372 does not stop. Thereby, even if it is a case where the 1st operation effect of pattern A2, A4 is performed, the expectation with respect to the change of the 1st effective period gauge 372 can be given to a player, and improvement of an interest is aimed at. be able to.

  Moreover, interest can be improved by changing the display mode of the operation promotion image 373 based on the display of the first effective period gauge 372.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example in the second operation effect. FIG. 38 shows a display example of the effect display device 5 when executing the second operation effect. Note that the display example illustrated in FIG. 38 illustrates a case where the number of operations detected on the push button 31B is less than 10 times during the second effective period. For example, when the second effective period is started, regardless of the pattern of the second operation effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 38A, as shown in FIG. 38A, the second number of times gauge 381, the second effective period gauge 382, and An operation promotion image 383 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), regardless of the second operation effect pattern, the white fill area in the second effective period gauge 382 is reduced and displayed in red with the passage of time. The area is exposed. Further, every time an operation on the push button 31B is detected, the second number gauge 381 changes to a display corresponding to the number Q.

  If the second operation effect pattern is one of the patterns B2 and B4, as shown in FIG. 38C, the second effective period is reached when 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the second effective period. The gauge 382 becomes the first end mode, and the second effective period ends.

  If the second operation effect pattern is any one of patterns B1 and B3, 3 seconds have elapsed after the start of the second effective period, as shown in FIG. 38 (D), after FIG. 38 (B). At this point, the second effective period gauge 382 becomes a common mode in common with the first end mode. When the time further elapses, as shown in FIG. 38 (E), the red painted area in the second effective period gauge 382 is reduced and the black painted area is exposed. Then, after 6 seconds from the start of the second effective period, as shown in FIG. 38 (F), the second effective period gauge 382 enters the second end mode, and the second effective period ends.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 38E and 38F, after the entire range of the second effective period gauge 382 becomes a red painted area, the area changes to a black painted area. Although the case where it goes is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, a plurality of types of change modes (for example, different fill colors and patterns) are provided after the entire range of the second effective period gauge 382 has become a red-filled region, and red fill-up is performed according to any of the change modes. You may comprise so that an expectation degree (a jackpot expectation degree, a reach expectation degree, a probable change expectation degree) may differ according to whether an area | region changes further.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the entire range of the second effective period gauge 382 becomes the red filled area, the second effective period gauge 382 further changes once (in this example, it changes to the black filled area). However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the second effective period gauge 382 may be changed a plurality of times. For example, as shown in FIG. 38 (F), after the second effective period gauge 382 is changed to a black filled area, the second effective period gauge 382 may be further changed to a filled area of another color. Good.

  As described above, as the second operation effect pattern, the second effective period gauge 382 is changed from the start mode to the first end mode, and the second effective period gauge 382 is started. The patterns B1 and B3 that are changed from the mode through the common mode to the second end mode and end the second effective period are provided. Thereby, a player's expectation can be maintained.

  Moreover, interest can be improved by detecting the operation to the push button 31B and changing the display mode of the second number gauge 381.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a detection means (in this example, a push button 31B) that can detect a player's action. Push sensor 35B that can detect a pressing operation on the sensor, which can detect an operation on another operation member (in this example, a tilt sensor 75A that can detect a pressing operation on the trigger button 74, and a tilt to the stick controller 31A. A tilt direction sensor unit 76) capable of detecting an operation, or a non-contact type sensor such as an infrared sensor or a motion sensor. , The first effective period) is suggested (in this example, the first effective period gauge is displayed), and the display mode of the suggested display is changed toward a predetermined mode (in this example, the end mode). (In this example, the production control microcomputer 90 executes steps S2610 and S3307), before the display mode of the suggestion display changes to the predetermined mode (in this example, the push button Detect 10 operations on 31 B. If the state changes based on the motion detection, the meter, numerical value, display effect (effect that defeats the enemy character), and lighting of the lamp will be in a predetermined state. The specific effect (in this example, the first specific effect) can be executed when it is established (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90 executes step S2622). If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the change of the display mode of the suggestion display can be stopped before the display mode of the suggestion display changes to the predetermined mode (in this example, the microcomputer for effect control) 90, it is possible to avoid the execution of step S2610 and stop the change of the first effective period gauge by performing Y to S2608 of step S2606 or steps S2612 to S2615). As a result, the change in the suggestion display stops, so the actual effective period may be longer than the appearance of the suggestion display, and it can be shown as if the effective period has been extended. it can.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is detected that the motion is continuously detected by the detecting means (in this example, detecting ten operations (continuous hitting) on the push button 31 </ b> B. (A so-called long press) may be detected.) And a specific effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90 uses the number of times P in step S2620). Step S2622 can be executed only when “10” is “10”). Thereby, it can be shown that the effective period of continuous operation | movement was extended, and an interest can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, an effect display (in this example, the display of the first number gauge) is performed, and the display mode of the effect display is changed step by step based on the detection of the operation by the detecting means. (In this example, the production control microcomputer 90 executes step S2619), and the display mode of the production display is in a specific stage (in this example, the first operation on the push button 31B is detected during the first effective period. In the case where the first display area is stored up to the first area stored in the second area or the predetermined area after the second area may be stored), the display mode of the suggestion display is changed. It is possible to stop (in this example, the production control microcomputer 90 can avoid step S2610 only when Y in step S2606). Thereby, the change of suggestion display can be stopped appropriately. Further, since the change of the display mode of the suggestion display is stopped when the player actively performs the operation, it is possible to prompt the aggressive operation.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute a notification effect (in this example, “continuous hitting plus” display) that notifies that the change in the display mode of the suggestion display has been stopped (in this example, the effect control). The microcomputer 90 executes step S2608). Thereby, it can prevent misinterpreting that the stop of the change of suggestion display is a malfunction.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first suggestion display (in this example, patterns A2 and A4) in which the actual effective period and the suggested effective period coincide with the actual effective period and the suggested effective period match. Second suggestion display (patterns A1, A3 in this example) can be performed (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90 selects the first operation effect pattern by performing step S3911. The first effective period corresponding to the first operation effect pattern is set by performing step S3304). Thereby, even if it is a 1st suggestion display, the feeling of expectation with respect to the stop of the display mode of a suggestion display can be given to a player.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs a promotion display that prompts the player to perform an action (in this example, the production control microcomputer 90 executes steps S2611 and S3307), and the player's action is displayed during the execution of the promotion display. When the motion is detected continuously, the display mode of the promotion display (in this example, the first display mode and the second display mode. The display mode is changed to three or more types of display modes according to the period during which the motion is continuously detected. (In this example, the production control microcomputer 90 displays the first operation promotion display according to the remaining time of the first effective period indicated by the first effective period gauge in step S2611. By executing this, the display mode of the first operation promotion display is changed according to the elapsed first effective period). Thereby, by performing an effect that is not monotonous, the monotonous effect can be prevented and the interest can be improved.

  Note that the display mode of the promotion display corresponds to the player's action (for example, the number of times the operation of the push button 31B is detected), the reliability (for example, the reliability for executing the specific effect, or the big hit. It is good also as being changeable according to reliability.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a detecting means capable of detecting a player's action (in this example, a push sensor capable of detecting a pressing operation on the push button 31B). 35B, which can detect operations on other operation members (in this example, a trigger sensor 75 that can detect a pressing operation on the trigger button 74, and a tilt direction sensor unit 76 that can detect a tilt operation on the stick controller 31A. ) Or a non-contact type sensor such as an infrared sensor or a motion sensor.) And suggesting an effective period of operation (second effective period in this example) Display (in this example, display of the second effective period gauge) is performed (in this example, the production control microcomputer 90 executes steps S2804, S2808, and S3314). To). In addition, a display common to the first state (patterns B2 and B4 in this example) that suggests the end of the effective period by changing the suggestion display to a predetermined state (in this example, the first end mode). The second mode (pattern in this example) suggests the end of the valid period by changing to the specific state (second end mode in this example) after changing to the mode (common mode in this example) once. B1 and B3) can be displayed (in this example, the production control microcomputer 90 selects the second operation production pattern in step S3914 and then performs step S2804). , S2808 is executed). Thereby, after changing the suggestion display to the display mode common to the predetermined state, it becomes the effective period until it is further changed to the specific state, so that the expectation can be maintained.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, in the effect that the operation is continuously detected by the detecting means (in this example, the second operation effect), the suggestion display is performed in the second mode (in this example, for effect control) The microcomputer 90 can execute a second operation effect for detecting repeated hits on the push button 31B (may be an effect for detecting a continuous operation (so-called long press) for a predetermined time or more) with patterns B1 and B3. It was decided that. Thereby, it can be shown that the effective period of continuous operation | movement was extended, and an interest can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, a change display in which the display mode changes in accordance with the detection of the operation by the detecting means (in this example, the display of the second number gauge. (In this example, the production control microcomputer 90 executes step S2812). Thereby, interest can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, the suggestion display according to the second aspect is more reliable than the suggestion display according to the first aspect to be controlled in a state advantageous to the player (in this example, the effect control) The microcomputer 90 uses the second operation effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG. 33B to select the second operation effect pattern, so that the second operation effect of the patterns B2 and B4 is executed. It is assumed that the second operation effect of B1 and B3 is more reliable for the big hit and the reliability for executing the specific effect). Thereby, expectation can be given to a player.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gauges (first effective period gauge, second effective period gauge) are displayed as “indication display”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a numerical display (for example, the remaining time is displayed as “3 seconds remaining”, “1 second remaining”, etc.) or a change of a predetermined image (for example, a character or an item) is set as “indication display”. Also good.

  In the first embodiment, the first specific effect is executed as the “specific effect”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect in which an ally character wins an enemy character, an effect in which a predetermined sound is output from the speaker 8, an effect in which a predetermined light emitting member (a frame LED 9 or a board LED provided on the game board 2) is emitted, An effect in which the first number gauge performs a specific change (for example, the size changes or emits light) may be executed as a “specific effect”, or the first number gauge reaches the maximum water level. It may be that which stores itself as a “specific effect” (that is, an effect different from the change in the first number gauge is not executed as a specific effect).

  In the first embodiment, the “specific effect” can be executed only in the case of a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be there.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the effective period (when ten operations on the push button 31B are not detected during the first effective period or the second effective period), the specific Although the effect is not executed, the specific effect may be executed even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the effective period.

  In the first embodiment, the change in the first effective period gauge can be stopped only once in the first operation effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the change is stopped a plurality of times. It may be possible.

  Moreover, in 1st Embodiment, although the length of the stop period of the 1st effective period gauge in a 1st operation effect was decided uniformly, it is not restricted to this. For example, a plurality of times may be provided as the length of the stop period, and one of the times may be selected. In that case, the reliability (for example, the reliability with respect to the execution of the first specific effect and the reliability with respect to the big hit) varies depending on which time is selected as the length of the stop period. Also good.

  In the first embodiment, in the patterns B1 and B3 in the second operation effect, the period until the second effective period gauge changes from the start mode to the common mode (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “first half period”). The period until the change from the common mode to the second end mode (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “second half period”) is 3 seconds, but is not limited thereto. For example, the first half period and the second half period may be different. In this case, the rate of decrease of the painted area of the second effective period gauge in the first half period is different from the rate of decrease of the painted area of the second effective period gauge in the second half period, and the interest can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the length of the second half period is uniform, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of times may be provided as the length of the second half period, and one of the times may be selected. In that case, the reliability (for example, the reliability with respect to the execution of the second specific effect and the reliability with respect to the big hit) differs depending on which time is selected as the length of the second half period. Also good.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the first operation effect and the second operation effect are executed in the variation with the super reach A and the super reach B, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in any variation pattern, at least one of the first operation effect and the second operation effect may be executable.

  In addition, the reliability (for example, the reliability with respect to the execution of the specific effects (the first specific effect and the second specific effect) and the reliability with respect to the big hit) is different between the first operation effect and the second operation effect. It is good as well.

  In the first embodiment, the first specific effect and the second specific effect are different from each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first specific effect and the second specific effect are the same. An effect indicating an aspect (for example, an effect of performing a predetermined display, an effect of operating a predetermined effect movable member (so-called accessory), an effect of causing a predetermined light emitting member to emit light, an effect of outputting a predetermined sound) Also good.

  In addition, a high-reliability effect (for example, a victory effect in which an ally character wins an enemy character) that notifies the fact that there is a high probability of winning a big hit (including that it will surely be a big win) is specified. When the operation effect is finished without the execution condition of the specific effect being satisfied (when the operation effect pattern is detected when 10 operations are detected but the specific effect is not executed) or 10 times When the effective period ends without detecting the operation (even though the first effective period is the first operation effect pattern of 5 seconds, one operation can be detected until 2 seconds have passed since the start. (Including the case where steps S2609A and S2609B are executed)), a low-reliability effect (for example, notifying the fact that the possibility of a big hit is low is different from the high-reliability effect) For example, in a gaming machine that executes a defeat effect in which an ally character loses to an enemy character), if a low-reliability effect is executed without satisfying the execution condition of the specific effect despite the big hit fluctuation, After the execution of the degree effect, the relief effect (for example, the effect that the ally character rises and defeats the enemy character) is executed (for example, if the victory effect, the defeat effect, and the relief effect are effects based on the process data, the first operation effect ends) Alternatively, at the end of the second operation effect, the process table for performing the defeat effect and the relief effect may be replaced by replacing the process table for performing the defeat effect and the relief effect.

  In addition, when a standby effect (for example, an effect of notifying the variable display result) that is executed after the first effective period has elapsed is provided, based on the length of the first effective period, The timing at which the performance is executed will be different. For example, when the first operation effect in the patterns A1 and A3 is performed, the first operation effect in the patterns A2 and A4 is performed while the first effective period ends 3 seconds after the execution start of the first operation effect. In this case, since the first effective period ends after 5 seconds from the start of execution of the first operation effect, an error of 2 seconds occurs depending on the first operation effect pattern. Therefore, when the first operation effect having the first effective period of 3 seconds (the first operation effect in the patterns A2 and A4) is performed, the first operation effect having the first effective period of 5 seconds (pattern A1, The period from the end of the standby effect until the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (specifically, the period in which the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is manually displayed) than when the first operation effect in A3 is performed. It is good also as adjusting the length of fluctuation | variation time by providing 2 seconds long. When the length of the first effective period (whether or not the change of the first effective period gauge is stopped) is associated with the variation pattern, the first operation effect with the first effective period being 3 seconds. The variation pattern that executes (first operation effect that does not stop the change of the first effective period gauge) is the first operation effect (the first operation effect that stops the change of the first effective period gauge is 5 seconds). If the fluctuation time is set shorter by 2 seconds than the fluctuation pattern in which one operation effect) is executed, it is not necessary to perform the adjustment described above.

  Similarly, in the second operation effect, when the second operation effect (second operation effect in patterns B2 and B4) having a second effective period of 3 seconds is performed, the second effective period is 6 seconds. Compared to the case where two operation effects (second operation effects in patterns B1 and B3) are performed, the period from when the standby effect is ended until the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (specifically, the effect that is stopped and displayed) It is also possible to adjust the length of the fluctuation time by providing a longer period of 3 seconds for the period in which the symbols are automatically displayed. When the length of the second effective period (whether or not the second effective period appears to be extended) is associated with the variation pattern, the second operation effect whose second effective period is 3 seconds. The variation pattern that executes (second operation effect that does not appear as if the second effective period is extended) makes the second operation effect that the second effective period is 6 seconds (appears as if the second effective period has been extended). If the fluctuation time is set shorter by 3 seconds than the fluctuation pattern in which the second operation effect) is executed, it is not necessary to perform the adjustment described above.

  Moreover, in 1st Embodiment, before the display mode of a suggestion display changes to a predetermined mode, the production | presentation (1st operation effect) which stops the change of the display mode of a suggestion display, and a suggestion display are changed to a predetermined state. Either the first mode that suggests the end of the effective period, or the second mode that suggests the end of the effective period by changing the display mode to the specific state after changing to the display mode common to the predetermined state. Although the effect (second operation effect) in which the suggestion display is performed is different from each other, the same effect may be used.

  For example, a suggestion display suggesting an effective period of operation is performed, the suggestion display is changed toward a predetermined state or a specific state, and the predetermined condition based on the detection of the operation is performed before the display mode of the suggestion display is changed to the predetermined mode. If the specific effect can be executed when is satisfied, and the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the change of the suggestion display can be stopped before the suggestion display changes to the predetermined state or the specific state. The first mode that suggests the end of the effective period by changing the display to a predetermined state, and the end of the effective period are suggested by further changing to a specific state after once changing to a display mode common to the predetermined state It is good also as performing the production | presentation which can perform a suggestion display in either aspect with a 2nd aspect.

  Specifically, a third effective period gauge indicating the third effective period of the operation is displayed, and the third effective period gauge is changed from the start state (the state painted in white) to the first end mode (the painted in red). The first pattern that suggests the end of the third effective period by changing to a state that is) and once changed from the start state to the common mode (the state that is painted red) common to the first end mode Furthermore, a second pattern that suggests the end of the third effective period by changing to the second end state (the state painted in black) is provided as an effect pattern, and the first pattern and the second pattern At least one of them may be able to temporarily stop the change of the third effective period gauge. The timing for temporarily stopping the change of the third effective period gauge in the second pattern may be before changing to the common mode, after changing to the common mode, or both. May be.

  Moreover, in 1st Embodiment, although it decided to produce based on having detected operation to push button 31B, it does not restrict to this. For example, a first promotion notification for encouraging the player's first action and a second promotion notification for encouraging the player's second action are performed, and a plurality of modes of pre-promotion notification are provided before the first promotion notification and the second promotion notification. A first gaming machine that performs the pre-promotion notification, can detect the first action and the second action, and can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection result. Depending on the types of the 1 promotion notification and the 2nd promotion notification, the proportion of notifications of effects that are advantageous to the player may be different as the predetermined effects. Specifically, a description will be given using the following modification. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the same location as the Example mentioned above.

  In this modification, it is possible to detect a pressing operation on the push button 31B and a tilting operation on the stick controller 31A.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an operation effect determination process for buttons and the like in the modification. The button or other operation effect determination process is a process performed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect symbol variation start process (FIG. 31) when the variation pattern indicates super reach. In the button or other operation effect determination process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 executes an operation promotion display determination process for determining the type of the operation promotion display as the operation promotion notification (step S293A). In this operation promotion display determination process (step S293A), one operation promotion display is determined from among a plurality of types of operation promotion displays (for example, the operation promotion display of the push button 31B and the operation promotion display of the stick controller 31A).

  The operation promotion display determined in step S293A is executed in step S8105 of the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 35).

  Specifically, in the operation promotion display determination process (step S293A) shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the operation promotion display determination random number SR0 (see FIG. 40), and the extracted numerical data. The type of operation promotion display is determined using the operation promotion display determination table shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), when the variation pattern is super reach loss, “push button operation promotion display” is determined with a probability of 70%, and “stick controller operation promotion display” is 30. It is determined with a probability of%. In addition, when the variation pattern is a super reach big hit, “push button operation promotion display” is determined with a probability of 40%, and “stick controller operation promotion display” is determined with a probability of 60%. It has become.

  Because the determination probability is set in this way, when “stick controller operation promotion display” is executed in super reach, it can be a big hit rather than “push button operation promotion display” is executed. It can be enjoyed with a sense of expectation for the button production by the stick controller 31A. Also, when “push button operation promotion display” is executed in the super reach, there is a possibility of a big hit, and the button effect by the push button 31B can be enjoyed with a sense of expectation.

  Note that “push button operation promotion display” and “stick controller operation promotion display” may be determined with a probability other than the probability shown in FIG.

  As the operation promotion display, there are an operation promotion display for prompting the operation of the push button 31B and an operation promotion display for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A. The operation promotion display of the push button 31B is an aspect in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed at the center position of the display area. In other words, any image may be used as long as it can prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. The operation promotion display of the stick controller 31A is an aspect in which the image of the stick controller 31A is displayed at the center position of the display area. In other words, any image may be used as long as it can prompt the player to operate the stick controller 31A.

  Further, an operation effective period display (for example, a horizontal bar-shaped indicator display) indicating the operation effective period of the operation unit (push button 31B or stick controller 31A at the protruding position) is added to the operation promotion display. The indicator display shows that the entire width is filled and the operation effective period remains the maximum period. The indicator display is a display indicating that the operation effective period has ended when the painted area is reduced in order from the right side as the operation effective period becomes shorter and the painted area disappears. By the indicator display, the player can grasp the operation effective period of the operation unit (the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A at the protruding position), and can operate the operation unit within the operation effective period. In this modification, an indicator display that quantitatively displays the operation effective period is used, but a 7-segment display that numerically displays the operation effective period may be used, and various displays can be used. In addition, the operation valid period display may be displayed for the first time when the operation promotion display is displayed. Further, instead of the operation effective period display, or along with it, voice notification of the operation effective period may be performed. Further, the operation valid period display may not be provided.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 executes pre-operation promotion display determination processing for determining the mode of the pre-operation promotion display (pre-operation promotion notification) displayed before the operation promotion display ( Step S293B). In this pre-operation promotion display determination processing, one pre-operation promotion display is determined from a plurality of modes before operation promotion (for example, common effect, 2 button effect, 4 button effect, and 4V effect). . In the 4V con-effect, four stick controller images appear.

  In addition, the display before operation promotion determined in step S293B is executed in step S8105 of the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 35).

  Specifically, in the pre-operation promotion display determination process (step S293B), the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the pre-operation promotion display determination random number SR1 (see FIG. 40), and the extracted numerical data and diagram. The pre-operation promotion display mode is determined using the pre-operation promotion display determination table shown in 41 (B) and 41 (C).

  For example, when the type of operation promotion display is determined to be, for example, the push button 31B in the operation promotion display determination process (step S293A), the display determination table before operation promotion for the push button 31B shown in FIG. Is used to determine the display mode before operation promotion. As shown in FIG. 41 (B), in the case where the variation pattern is super reach loss, the “display before promoting operation of common effect” is determined with a probability of 60%, and “display before promoting operation of two button effect”. Is determined with a probability of 30%, and “display before promoting operation of a four-button effect” is determined with a probability of 10%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is a big hit with super reach, the “pre-promotion display of common effects” is determined with a probability of 20%, and the “pre-promotion display of 2-button effects” is determined with a probability of 30%. Thus, “display before promoting operation of 4-button effect” is determined with a probability of 50%. Note that “display before operation promotion of common effect”, “display before operation promotion of 2-button effect”, and “display before promotion of operation of 4-button effect” may be determined with a probability other than the above.

  Further, when the type of the operation promotion display is determined to be, for example, the stick controller 31A in the operation promotion display determination process (step S293A), the display determination table before operation promotion for the stick controller 31A shown in FIG. Is used to determine the display mode before operation promotion. As shown in FIG. 41C, in the case where the variation pattern is super reach loss, “display before promoting operation of common effect” is determined with a probability of 70%, and “display before promoting operation of 4V control effect” Is determined with a probability of 30%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach big hit, the “pre-promotion display of common effects” is determined with a probability of 40%, and the “pre-promotion display of 4V-con effects” is determined with a probability of 60%. It has come to be. It should be noted that “display before operation promotion of common effect” and “display before operation promotion of 4V con-effect” may be determined with a probability other than the above.

  In this modification, each of the operation promotion display determination random number SR0 and the pre-operation promotion display determination random number SR1 shown in FIG. 40 is a random number in the range of 1 to 100, and any numerical value in the range of 1 to 100. Although data is extracted, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the operation promotion display determination random number SR0 and the pre-operation promotion display determination random number SR1 may be determined appropriately. In addition, an operation promotion display determination random number counter for generating the operation promotion display determination random number SR0 and an operation promotion display determination random number counter for generating the operation promotion display determination random number SR1 are generated in the effect control board 12. The operation promotion display determination random number counter and the pre-operation promotion display determination random number counter are updated for each timer interruption in the random number update process.

  Note that the pre-operation promotion display and the start timing of the operation promotion display are described in a process table of effects such as buttons.

  Here, the various types of display before promoting operation will be described. First, “display before operation promotion of common effect” is a display before operation promotion that is used in common before the operation promotion display of the push button 31B and the operation promotion display of the stick controller 31A. It is a display in which the type of button or the like cannot be specified only by the common effect. In the present modification, “common effect pre-promotion display” is a common image in a mode in which the type of button (push button 31B or stick controller 31A) cannot be specified from the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 5. (For example, images such as translucent, indeterminate or unclear buttons, etc.) appear, both common images move toward the center, and both common images overlap at the center position of the display area and emit light. The display mode is used. Note that the common effect pre-operation display is not limited to this display mode, and various display modes can be used. For example, as a display before promoting the operation of the common effect, a display mode (for example, a display mode called a condensing effect) in which light gathers in all or a part of the display area of the effect display device 5 and emits strong light. It may be used. Immediately after this condensing effect, an operation promotion display is displayed.

  Next, in the “2 button effect display before operation promotion”, push button images that can be identified as the push button 31B appear from both the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 5, respectively. The push button image moves toward the center, and both push button images overlap at the center position of the display area and emit light. In the display before promoting the operation of the two-button effect, the player can specify that it is the push button 31B. Therefore, it can be expected that the operation promoting display of the push button 31B will be displayed after this, and prepare for the operation of the push button 31B. It is possible. The display before the operation promotion of the two-button effect is not limited to this display mode, and various display modes can be used.

  Next, in the “display before promoting operation of the four button effect”, push button images that can identify the push button 31B appear from the four corners of the display area of the effect display device 5, respectively, and four push buttons are displayed. The button image moves toward the center, and the four push button images overlap at the center position of the display area and emit light. Since the player can specify that the button is the push button 31B even in the 4-button effect display before the operation promotion, it can be expected that the operation promotion display of the push button 31B will be displayed after this, and prepare for the operation of the push button 31B. It is possible. The display before promoting the operation of the 4-button effect is not limited to this display mode, and various display modes can be used.

  Next, in the “display before promoting operation of 4V effect”, stick controller images that can identify the stick controller 31A appear from the four corners of the display area of the effect display device 5, respectively. The display mode is such that the controller image moves toward the center, and the four stick controller images overlap at the center position of the display area and emit light. Since the player can specify that the player is the stick controller 31A in the display before promoting the operation of the 4V con-effect, it can be expected that the operation promoting display of the stick controller 31A will be displayed after this, and prepare for the operation of the stick controller 31A. It is possible. The display before promoting the operation of the 4V con-effect is not limited to this display mode, and various display modes can be used.

  In this modification, the indicator display is added to the display before the operation promotion (common effect, 2-button effect, 4-button effect, 4V effect, etc.). .

  In addition, you may make it the aspect of an indicator display change with types (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) of an operation part. For example, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be different in at least one of the color, shape, size, etc. of the indicator display, or one of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B has an indicator display. However, the indicator display may not be provided. In this case, the aspect of the indicator display can be interesting, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

  Further, even if the same operation promotion display is used, the indicator display may be displayed or not displayed depending on the situation (for example, the type of variation pattern). Further, there are a plurality of types of operation promotion display sizes (for example, if the push button 31B, the large push button 31B (large button) or the small push button 31B (small button)), the large button The small button may or may not have indicator display, or the indicator display mode may be different. In these cases, the mode of operation promotion display can be increased, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 42, the operation effects such as buttons are roughly divided into two types, that is, push button effects and stick controller effects. There are a total of five types of push button effects and two types of stick controller effects. As the three types of push button effects, there are three types of operation promotion display of the push button 31B after any one of the common effect, the two button effect, and the four button effect before the operation promotion display is displayed. There is a production of. In addition, as two types of stick controller effects, there are two types of effects in which an operation promotion display of the stick controller 31A is displayed after any one of the common effect and the 4V con-effect display before the operation promotion is displayed. is there.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a cut-in effect determination process after the button or the like operation effect determination process (step S293). Using the cut-in effect determination table shown in FIG. 42, one cut-in effect from a plurality of types of cut-in effects (for example, cut-in effect A, cut-in effect B, and cut-in effect C) having different jackpot expectations. Determine the production. In addition, the degree of expectation for jackpot for the cut-in effect is higher in the cut-in effect B than in the cut-in effect A, and is higher in the cut-in effect C than in the cut-in effect B.

  Note that the cut-in effect determined in the cut-in effect determining process is executed in step S8105 of the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 35).

  For example, in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, the push button 31B as the type of the operation promotion display in the operation promotion display determination process (step S293A), as shown in FIG. When the pre-operation promotion display mode is determined as “common effect” or “2-button effect” in the determination process (step S293B), it is determined as cut-in effect A. Further, when the type of the operation promotion display is determined to be, for example, the push button 31B and the display mode before the operation promotion is determined to be “4 button effect”, it is determined to be the cut-in effect B. The type of operation promotion display is determined to be, for example, the stick controller 31A, and the cut-in effect B is also determined when the display mode before operation promotion is determined to be “common effect”. Further, when the type of the operation promotion display is determined to be, for example, the stick controller 31A and the display mode before the operation promotion is determined to be “4V effect”, the cut-in effect C is determined. In this way, depending on the mode of display before operation promotion and the type of operation promotion display, the ratio at which an effect having contents advantageous to the player (for example, a cut-in effect C) is notified as the predetermined effect differs.

  The cut-in effects include, for example, effects in which another short scene (for example, a scene in which a character image appears in a predetermined display mode) is inserted into a series of scenes (for example, battle scenes). .

  In this modification, the cut-in effect A is, for example, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the button or the like in the super reach effect, for example, the specific character image SC (for example, “ This is an effect in which a scene in a form in which a character image of “girl” appears (appears) is inserted.

  The cut-in effect B is a special display mode different from the normal background NB, for example, when there is a button operation by the player (operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A) during the operation valid period of the buttons in the super reach effect. This is an effect in which a scene in which the specific character image SC appears (appears) on the background image SB is inserted.

  The cut-in effect C is, for example, when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the operation valid period of buttons or the like in the super reach effect, for example, the specific character image SC and the information display image CI (for example, “ This is an effect in which a scene in the form of appearance (appears) is inserted. The execution start timing of the cut-in effect display after the button operation is described in the process table of effects such as buttons.

  By the way, in the cut-in effect determination table of this modification, “cut-in effect A” of “common effect + push button” is determined with a probability of 42% when the variation pattern is super reach loss. “Cut-in effect A” of “button effect + push button” is determined with a probability of 21%, and “Cut-in effect B” of “4 button effect + push button” is determined with a probability of 7%. “Cut-in effect B” of “effect + stick controller” is determined with a probability of 21%, and “cut-in effect C” of “4V control effect + stick controller” is determined with a probability of 9%. Yes. In the case where the fluctuation pattern is a super reach big hit, the “cut-in effect A” of “common effect + push button” is determined with a probability of 8%, and the “cut-in” of “2-button effect + push button” is determined. "Direction A" is determined with a probability of 12%, "Cut-in effect B" of "4-button effect + push button" is determined with a probability of 20%, and "Cut-in effect B" of "Common effect + stick controller" "Is determined with a probability of 24%, and" Cut-in effect C "of" 4V control effect + stick controller "is determined with a probability of 36%.

  Further, even if the pre-operation promotion display of the common effect is displayed, if the operation promotion display of the stick controller 31A is subsequently displayed (that is, “common effect + stick controller”), the “common effect” is displayed. Since the big hit expectation degree is higher than “+ push button”, it can be expected that the operation promotion display of the stick controller 31A is displayed, and the display before the operation promotion of the common effect can be made surprising. , Can improve the fun of the game.

  Since the determination probability is set in this way, when the super-reach big hit is made in the variation display, “cut-in effect B” and “cut-in effect C” are more easily executed than when the super reach loss occurs. It has become. Further, in the case of super reach loss, “cut-in effect A” is easily executed. That is, the cut-in effect B and the cut-in effect C are more likely to be a big hit than the cut-in effect A.

  In the cut-in effect determination table shown in FIG. 42, the contents of the cut-in effect are the same for the super reach jackpot and the super reach loser, but the table is not limited to this.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present modified example, as shown in FIG. 42, the display mode before the operation promotion (for example, any one of the common effect, the two button effect, the four button effect, or the four volt effect) Depending on the type of operation promotion display and the type of operation promotion display (for example, which operation promotion display of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A), an effect (cut-in) of contents advantageous to the player as a predetermined effect Since the rate at which the performance C or the like is executed is different, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the mode of display before operation promotion (pre-promotion notification) and the type of operation promotion display (promotion notification). Thereby, the interest property of a game can be improved.

  In this modification, a cut-in effect is used as the “predetermined effect”, but the present invention is not limited to this. Various effects executed in response to the operation of the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) (for example, an effect in which a specific character appears, an effect in which the display mode of the background image is changed, another display) The reach of the aspect).

  Further, since the pre-operation promotion display and the operation promotion display are executed during the super reach production (during the specific production), the player can be focused on the pre-operation promotion display mode and the type of operation promotion display. Can improve the interest of In addition, in the present modification, the specific presentation may be during variable display in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is not limited to the super reach presentation but may be during the normal reach production or the non-reach production. Further, the specific effect may be a button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, a button effect at the time of reaching reach, a hit / fail effect, a continuous hit button effect, a long press button effect, or the like. Further, the specific effect may be during a single game effect in a gaming machine (for example, a slot machine) other than the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a continuous effect performed between a plurality of games.

  Further, before the operation promotion display (first operation promotion display) of the push button 31B and the operation promotion display (second operation promotion display) of the stick controller 31A (before execution) are displayed (before execution), the common effect before operation promotion display (common) Display before promoting operation) is displayed. In other words, when the common pre-operation promotion display is displayed, after the pre-operation promotion display, the push button 31B operation promotion display (first operation promotion display) and the stick controller 31A operation promotion display (second operation) It is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the display (promotion display) is displayed, and it is possible to improve the fun of the effect of the operation unit (push button 31B or stick controller 31A).

  In addition, the number of modes of the pre-operation promotion display (pre-promotion notification) that can be executed before the operation promotion display (first promotion notification) of the push button 31B (for example, the common effect, the two button effect, and the four button effect in FIG. 42). ) And the number of modes before operation promotion display (pre-promotion notification) that can be executed before the operation promotion display (second promotion notification) of the stick controller 31A (for example, the common effect of FIG. 42 and the 4V con-effect) Since it is different from (2 types), the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the number of modes before operation promotion display before the operation promotion display of the push button 31B is three types, and the number of modes before operation promotion display before the operation promotion display of the stick controller 31A (pre-promotion notification) is two types. However, it is not limited to these numbers. Moreover, it is good also considering the number of both modes as the same number.

  In addition, the number of modes of the pre-operation promotion display (pre-promotion notification) that can be executed before the operation promotion display (first promotion notification) of the push button 31B (for example, the common effect, the two button effect, and the four button effect in FIG. 42). 3), the number of modes of pre-operation promotion display (pre-promotion notification) that can be executed before the operation promotion display (second promotion notification) of the stick controller 31A (for example, the common effect and the 4V con-effect of FIG. 42) (2 types) is less, so the fun of the game can be improved. When the expectation level (big hit expectation level) that is more advantageous when the operation promotion display of the stick controller 31A is executed is higher than when the operation promotion display of the push button 31B is executed as in this modification example The aspect of the display before operation promotion before the operation promotion display of the stick controller 31A is reduced by reducing the number of display modes before the operation promotion display of the stick controller 31A compared to the operation promotion display of the push button 31B. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation when the player operates the stick controller 31A (second operation) according to the operation promotion display (second promotion notification) of the stick controller 31A.

  In addition, since the push button image is displayed in the display before the operation promotion of the 2-button effect or the 4-button effect, it can be expected that the operation promotion display of the push button 31B is displayed after this. Further, since the stick controller image is displayed in the display before promoting the operation of the 4V con-effect, it can be expected that the operation promoting display of the stick controller 31A is displayed after this. For this reason, which operation promotion display (promotion notification) is executed is known in advance, the player can prepare for the operation of the push button 31B (first operation) or the operation of the stick controller 31A (second operation). It becomes.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a push button 31B (first operation unit) and a stick controller 31A (second operation unit) as operation units, and promotes an operation for prompting an operation of the push button 31B (first operation unit). The operation unit to be operated by the player is clarified by the display (first operation promotion display) and the operation promotion display (second operation promotion display) that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A (second operation unit). It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can accurately operate the operation unit.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings (FIGS. 43 to 78). FIG. 43 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment as viewed from the front. FIG. 44 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the second embodiment, a part or all of the contents already described in the first embodiment will be described again (described in the same or different expression as in the first embodiment), or the first In some cases, the description of a part or all of the content already described in the embodiment is omitted, or in the first embodiment, a part or all of the content that is not described in the first embodiment may be described. In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, different names may be used for the same or similar objects. As an example, the “effect design” in the first embodiment is referred to as “decorative design” in the second embodiment, and “random R” in the first embodiment is referred to as “MR1” in the second embodiment. The “first symbol variation designation command” in the first embodiment is referred to as a “first variation start command” in the second embodiment, and the “production control process flag” in the first embodiment is defined in the second embodiment. This is referred to as “production process flag”, and “variation pattern command reception waiting process” in the first embodiment is referred to as “variable display start waiting process” in the second embodiment, and “big hit display process” in the first embodiment. In the second embodiment, the three processes “in-round process” and “post-round process” may be simply referred to as “attacker opening effect process”. Further, in the description of each step of the flowchart in the second embodiment, for example, a portion described as “Step S1” may be abbreviated as “S1”.

  The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 43, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area (display screen) for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5 (on the display area), the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. Corresponding to each of them, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be distinguished from each other, are variably displayed in a decorative symbol display area such as three variable display portions. Different types of symbol numbers, such as any one of “1” to “9”, need only be attached to a plurality of types of ornament symbols variably displayed in each ornament symbol display area. Such variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronism with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). Note that the variable display of various display symbols, such as special symbols and decorative symbols, is synchronized, the variable display starts and ends at the same timing (same or approximate), and the variable display period is the same. (Same or approximate). The effect image indicating the decorative design is also referred to as an identification information image. Therefore, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol serving as the identification information image is performed. Is performed, and an effect image indicating the confirmed decorative pattern that is the display result is derived.

  For example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a decorative symbol display state is also called a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, and although the display result in the variable decorative symbol display is not definitely displayed, the variation of the decorative symbol due to scroll display or update display proceeds. The player can recognize that it is not. Note that the temporary stop display of the decorative design may include displaying the decorative design completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction. .

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display unit 5HL and a second hold display unit 5HR are arranged. The 1st reservation display part 5HL displays the 1st special figure reservation memory number so that identification is possible. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of variable display hold corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The 2nd reservation display part 5HR displays the 2nd special figure reservation memory number so that identification is possible. The second special figure holding memory number is the variable display holding number corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is such that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It occurs based on the start winning by doing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game has not yet been established due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Is done.

  For example, a special game start condition (first start condition) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A due to the occurrence of the first start prize that the game ball passes (enters) through the first start prize opening. ) Is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first special figure holding storage number is 1. Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when the second start winning that the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening is generated, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B (second start condition) ) Is established, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not established, the second special figure holding memory number is 1. Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). If the first special figure reservation storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) when the first start winning is generated, the first start condition is not satisfied, and the first start winning is based on the start winning. The special figure game may be invalid and only the payout of the prize ball may be performed. Further, if the second special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) when the second start winning is generated, the second start condition is not satisfied, and based on the start winning. The special figure game may be invalid and only the payout of the prize ball may be performed.

  In the first hold display section 5HL, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. In the second hold display section 5HR, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  The first hold display unit 5HL only needs to be configured so that the first hold display is performed, for example, right-justified (that is, centered in the display area). The first hold display section 5HL is provided with four display parts corresponding to “4” which is the upper limit value of the first special figure hold memory number, and the hold number “1” in order from the right end (center side of the display area). , “2”, “3”, “4”. When the number of holds of the special figure game using the first special figure increases due to the establishment of the first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display part 5HL, the hold on the first hold display part 5HL At the rightmost display portion corresponding to the number “1”, a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold memory number. If there is another first hold display in the first hold display portion 5HL, a new first hold display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other first hold display is performed. It is added to the part (corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”). When there is a plurality of first hold displays in the first hold display section 5HL, and when a special figure game using the first special figure is started due to establishment of a new first start condition, the first hold display section 5HL While deleting (digesting) the first hold display in the rightmost display portion corresponding to the hold number “1”, each of the first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” Move (shift) in the direction (right side) of the erased display area. As described above, the first hold display unit 5HL is configured to perform hold display corresponding to the special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A that has not yet been started.

  The second hold display unit 5HR only needs to be configured so that the second hold display is performed, for example, left-justified (ie, center-side of the display area). The second hold display section 5HR is provided with four display parts that match the upper limit value “4” of the second special figure hold memory number, and the hold number “1” in order from the left end (the center side of the display area). , “2”, “3”, “4”. When the number of holdings of the special figure game using the second special figure increases due to the establishment of the second start condition, if there is no other second holding display in the second holding display part 5HR, the holding in the second holding display part 5HR At the leftmost display portion corresponding to the number “1”, a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented second special figure hold memory number. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display portion 5HR, a new second hold display is hidden on the right side of the display part where the other second hold display is performed. It is added to the part (corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”). When there is a plurality of second hold indications in the second hold display portion 5HR, when a special game using the second special drawing is started due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second hold display portion 5HR While deleting (digesting) the second hold display in the leftmost display part corresponding to the hold number “1”, each of the second hold display in the display part corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” Move (shift) in the direction (left side) of the erased display area. In this way, the second hold display unit 5HR is configured to perform hold display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B that has not yet started.

  A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the first hold display section 5HL and the second hold display section 5HR, or instead of the first hold display section 5HL and the second hold display section 5HR. . In the example shown in FIG. 43, the number of special figure reservation memories can be specified at the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the first hold display portion 5HL and the second hold display portion 5HR. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for displaying are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

  In the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a small symbol display area 5V which is smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of “left”, “middle” and “right”. In the small symbol display area 5V, the small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable symbols and special symbols. The effect image indicating the small symbol is also referred to as a notification information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 5V provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of the effect image indicating the small symbol serving as the notification information image is performed, and the effect image indicating the confirmed small symbol serving as the display result is displayed. Derived.

  In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small symbols different from the decorative symbols is performed. During the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols until the finalized decorative symbol that is the display result is derived, the variable display of small symbols continues to be performed in a certain display mode and disappears from the screen or is blocked. It is not shielded by. Therefore, the small symbol display area 5V is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V. The small symbols variably displayed in the small symbol display area 5V are always referred to as small symbols or effect small symbols. In the small symbol display area 5V, for example, a plurality of types of decorative symbols, each of which is a part of or all of a plurality of types of decorative symbols, such as a symbol indicating a number similar to a portion indicating a number in a decorative symbol. The effect image showing the small symbols may be variably displayed as the notification information image. The small symbol may be displayed only when the decorative symbol is not displayed. The variable display of the small symbols may be difficult or impossible to visually recognize during the execution period of the full-screen notice effect described later.

  In addition, a 4th symbol is provided next to the special symbol, the decorative symbol, and further the normal symbol, and the variable display of the 4th symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed and not displayed at a certain time interval in a specific display color (for example, blue) in the fourth symbol display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5 or outside the screen. This is realized by continuing display control that repeats. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the 4th symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

  Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided at positions separated from the display region of the image display device 5, such as the right side of the game region in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It has been. Therefore, the player who is paying attention to the effect by the display on the image display device 5 has difficulty in confirming the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable symbol variable display proceeds. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not a display result has been derived. In contrast, by performing variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, whether or not variable display is in progress, Whether or not the display result has been derived can be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) is provided and a second start winning opening is formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening. Do not close. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning hole. ) Make it open. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter (pass) through the second start winning opening, while the expansion when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. You may comprise so that a game ball may enter (pass) more easily than an open state. As described above, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has the first variable state such as the open state or the expanded open state in which the game ball can pass (enter) through the second start winning port, and the game ball cannot pass (enter). It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a closed state or a normally open state that is difficult to pass (enter).

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media), and the first reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value. If it is less than (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 that is used for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 44, and the specific region that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. become unable. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ). In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 43). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display 20, there is provided a general figure reservation display 25C for displaying the number of normal figure storage as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the gate switch 21 of FIG.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit 35A including a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower pan body or the like below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35 </ b> B that detects the player's operation act on the push button 31 </ b> B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31 </ b> B.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 44 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. The main board 11 controls the turning on and off of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling variable display or controlling normal symbol variable display by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling on / off and coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize door.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are mounted. In other words, the effect control board 12 performs a display operation in the image display device 5, an operation for turning on or off all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical parts for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as all or a part, is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9, LED for decoration, etc. A lamp driver circuit for supplying a drive current for turning on and off the LED is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 44, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22 </ b> A and second start port switch 22 </ b> B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. Wiring is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example. Further, the main board 11 is connected with wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control, such as the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. The effect control command also includes an abnormal winning notification command for instructing abnormality notification. When the abnormality notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, an error notification process (S57) is executed under the control of the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 54). Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to “0” in advance.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 only needs to incorporate the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, the random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102 indicates a predetermined random number value. The random number value may be updated by storing numerical data and the CPU 103 updating the stored value regularly or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored. In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored so as to be rewritable.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in FIG. 5, a random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device as an effect electrical component included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on various information transmitted as effect control commands from the main board 11.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, a random counter for effects provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. . The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, it is possible to count numerical data indicating random values for determining various effects such as a random number for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of decorative symbols, and a random value for determining a notice effect. Controlled.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 44 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation, in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is, for example, from process data including effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, and the like. It is configured. The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  In the effect control execution data included in the effect control pattern, the display control data indicates the display mode of various images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. More specifically, the display control data includes various patterns such as a background, a decorative pattern, and a small pattern that constitute each frame displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 (an image that is a unit that is switched and displayed at a frame period). It is only necessary to include data specifying the type, position, size, etc. of the effect image indicating the character, etc., data specifying the display order (priority) when a plurality of effect images are displayed superimposed. The data indicating the display order (priority) of the effect images may be data indicating which effect image among the plurality of effect images is to be arranged on the front side when viewed from the player.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configured image data memory may be used.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (effect sound signal) transmitted to the audio control board 13, and a command (electrical signal) transmitted to the lamp control board 14 are transmitted. Etc.) is output.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is emitted based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the apparatus. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes (enters) the first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The first start condition is satisfied due to the detection. Thereafter, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done.

  Further, when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Therefore, the second start condition is established. Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 of FIG. Thereafter, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display such as the end of the previous normal symbol game has been completed. In the normal game, after a predetermined time has elapsed after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started or when a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and an effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is displayed on the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  After the special game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol to be a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (effect symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are also referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) becomes “big jackpot” (specific display result), and the specific gaming state is advantageous for the player. It is controlled to the big hit gaming state. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, and the loss symbol is derived and displayed, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) is “lost” (non-specific display result).

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is “big hit”, it is determined on the screen of the image display device 5 in advance. The finalized decorative symbol that is the winning combination is derived and displayed. As an example, a combination of big hits is determined by stopping and displaying the same decorative symbols all together on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, a period until a predetermined opening upper limit time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the big winning opening and a winning ball is generated. In the period up to, a round game (also simply referred to as “round”) is performed in which the big prize opening is continuously opened. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big prize opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “2” or “15”) is reached.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” may be included. When the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, as a round game in the big hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a first state (a big winning opening is in an open state) advantageous to the player. A normal open round in which the upper limit time to be performed is a relatively long time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to be in the first state (the big winning opening is open) as a round game in the big hit gaming state is relatively short. A short-term open round is executed, which is time (for example, 0.1 seconds). The big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a first specific gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in the short-term open round (the big winning opening is set by the big winning door). The upper limit of the period for setting the open state) is a second period (for example, 0.1 second) shorter than the first period in the normal open round. It should be noted that the same control as when the normal opening round is executed may be performed except that the opening period of the big prize opening is controlled to be the second period in the short-term opening round. Alternatively, when a short-term open round is executed, the number of round games executed is a second round number (for example, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (for example, “15”) that is the number of executions of the normal open round. ). That is, the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is in the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the big winning opening in each round game as compared to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is performed. The period to be changed becomes at least one of the second period shorter than the first period and the second round number of round games executed less than the first round number. That's fine.

  When such a short-term opening round is executed, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a prize winning opening. However, due to the opening period of the big winning opening being the second period (for example, 0.1 second), it becomes a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state (second specific gaming state) based on the fact that the jackpot type is “surprise” is the jackpot gaming state (first specified game state) based on the fact that the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”. The gaming state is more disadvantageous for the player than the gaming state. Thus, when the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed based on the fact that the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the game ball is likely to pass through the big winning opening. In the change mode, control is performed to change the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 between the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state). On the other hand, when the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed based on the fact that the jackpot type is “surprising”, the special change is made in the second change mode in which the gaming ball is difficult to pass through the big winning opening. Control is performed to change the variable winning ball apparatus 7 between the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state).

  After the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” (hit probability) is controlled to be a positive change state that is higher than the normal state based on the fact that the predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied. There is. In the probability change state, a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, for example, a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) or a big hit gaming state is started before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit gaming state is started regardless of the number of executions of variable display. After the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to the short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. In the short-time state, a predetermined short-time end condition is satisfied, for example, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or the big hit gaming state is started before the variable display execution number reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a short-time state. On the other hand, after the big hit gaming state is ended when the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise probability”, the gaming state becomes the probability change state.

  In the probable change state and the short time state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening than in the normal state. And a second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is “general”. Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than that in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per figure”. By making the control longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “high base control”). By controlling to such a probable change state and a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a “big hit” is shortened, and a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is obtained. Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

  In the image display device 5, the decorative symbol other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) is stopped in a state in which it matches the jackpot combination continuously for a predetermined time, A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to rocking, scaling, or deformation, or when multiple decorative symbols fluctuate synchronously with the same symbol, or the display position changes. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. As a reach effect, a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a display mode of the background image is changed, and a moving image different from the decorative design An effect operation different from changing the variation pattern of the decorative design, such as reproducing and displaying an image, may be executed. Not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are different from the operation modes before the reach mode. The operation mode may be included in the reach effect. The reach state and its state are referred to as the reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is not a big hit combination, it becomes “lost”, and the variability display state ends.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as reach patterns) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as reliability or big hit reliability) varies depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, a normal reach production (normal reach) and a super reach production (super reach) are preset. When the reach effect in the super reach is executed, there is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (expected degree of the big hit) than in the case where the reach effect in the normal reach is executed. In addition, the reach production that becomes the super reach may include a plurality of types of reach production including a super reach that executes a specific reach production in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is higher than other super reach.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach production, the variable display status of decorative designs may become reach status, and the variable display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. As an example, it is only necessary that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect can be executed during decorative display of the decorative design. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, a finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result after the variable symbol display is started in response to the start condition of the special symbol game being satisfied once. After the temporary stop until the derivation is displayed, it is possible to perform the effect display for changing (pseudo-continuous change) again up to a predetermined time (for example, up to 3 times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. What is necessary is just the number of times that the decorative symbol is re-variable in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, as an example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a plurality of pre-set pseudo-respective chances for special combinations are displayed. A decorative symbol that is one of the various types of lost combinations is displayed temporarily. In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a predetermined effect such as an image display as a re-variation effect may be executed in accordance with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change. Note that the re-variation effect is not limited to that by displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 5, and may include any effect operation using various effect devices.

  As an example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area during each variation display (including the initial variation) by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect Controls may be made so that the number of which is lit is increased one by one. Further, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation), the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs changes. May be controlled.

  As a further example of the re-change effect different from the image display, an effect model provided inside or outside the game area during each change display (including the initial change) by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (including the initial change) The movable member may be controlled to operate. At this time, during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation), the operation mode of the production model (movable member) may be controlled to change, or among the plurality of production models (movable member). It may be controlled so that what is operated in changes.

  Control may be performed so that a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during the period of each variable display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. . Further, as a re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative symbol that becomes a pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily stopped and displayed, a sound that becomes a special sound effect may be controlled to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or instead of some or all of these re-variation effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of effect models, display of effect images, sound effects Control may be performed so as to execute a re-variation effect in which some or all of the outputs are combined. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed multiple times, compared to a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. In the case where the effect mode changes, the possibility that a predetermined game value such as the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) may be increased.

  In the present embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed once to three times, so that the first start condition or the second start condition is established once. It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative design has been started 2 to 4 times in succession. When the number of repeated executions (pseudo-continuous times) of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) increases, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" (expected degree of big hit) than when the pseudo-continuous number is small. Get higher. Further, the production ratio may be controlled so as to change depending on the number of repeated executions of the pseudo continuous variation (number of pseudo continuous runs). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed twice, and “super reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed three times. Note that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed more than one to three times, for example, four or five times.

  In addition to “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using such variable display operation of decorative symbols include, for example, “slip”, “expansion chance eyes”, “end development opportunity eyes”, “slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “sliding”, “variable” of “left”, “middle”, “right” from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol to the display of the definite decorative symbol that is the variable display result is displayed. After changing the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a single or a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area 5L) of the temporarily stopped display of decorative symbols are displayed. And / or the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), the decorative symbol is changed again, and then the stop symbol is displayed. Thus, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped is performed.

  In the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, the decoration of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern that results in the variable display. In all of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is set as the reach state. Reach production begins. On the other hand, in the variable display effect of “end of development opportunity”, after the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols of the lost combinations (special combinations) that are the pseudo-continuous chances in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, Unlike the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect that changes the decorative symbols again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols change again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  During variable display of decorative patterns, unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-continuous”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, a message image or voice output is displayed. There is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the symbol variable display operation, that a reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is `` A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of being a “hit”.

  The effect operation as the notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbols after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is only necessary to be executed (started) prior to the reach mode (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation (effect mode) when such a notice effect is executed.

  The notice effect includes a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as a pre-read effect). The pre-reading notice effect indicates that the variable display result is “big hit” according to the production mode before the variable display that is subject to notice (the notice target) is the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”. It is a notice effect that can be announced in advance. In particular, a pre-reading notice effect that continuously gives notice over a variable display of decorative symbols executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special drawing games is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. In the pre-reading notice effect, before the variable display to be noticed is started, for example, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” based on the reserved memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start winning prize, etc. The production operation is started. In contrast to the pre-reading notice effect, the notice effect that is executed after the variable display subject to the notice is started is referred to as a single notice effect (also referred to as a single notice, a variable notice or a variable indication notice effect). The

  In this embodiment, as an example of the pre-reading notice effect, the display part of the first hold display in the first hold display part 5HL and the display part of the second hold display in the second hold display part 5HR are displayed in the normal state. By changing to a different display mode, a pre-reading notice effect of “pending display change” for notifying the possibility of “big hit” in variable display to be noticed is executed. More specifically, a specific color (for example, any one of red, green, blue, etc.) that is different from a predetermined color (for example, white) in a normal time is used as a display color in a display part that displays the number of special figure reservations to be specified. By so doing, it is only necessary to be able to notify that the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” is higher than usual. In addition, the display pattern in the first hold display and the second hold display is set to a specific pattern (for example, cherry blossom pattern) different from the normal time, so that the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is higher than usual. May be able to be notified. Alternatively, by displaying a predetermined message (for example, “secret”) as the first hold display or the second hold display, it is notified that the possibility that the display color is changed to a specific color is higher than usual ( Suggest) Such a hold display that suggests that the display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggestion hold display. The pre-reading notice effect of “hold display change” is also called a hold display change effect.

  The pre-reading notice effect that is executed based on the occurrence of the start prize is executed (started) after the start prize has occurred and before the player can determine whether or not the notice content by the pre-reading notice effect is realized. Anything is acceptable. For example, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state due to the occurrence of a certain start prize is that at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol based on the occurrence of the start prize becomes the reach state (or the non-reach state). Anything may be executed (started) before. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect that predicts that the variable display result may become a “big hit” due to the occurrence of a certain start prize is at least more than the display of the fixed decorative symbol in the variable display based on the occurrence of the start prize. Anything may be executed (started) before.

  When the hold display change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display may or may not change. An effect in which the display mode of the hold display changes among the hold display change effects is also called a hold display change success effect. An effect in which the display mode of the hold display does not change among the hold display change effects is also referred to as a hold display change failure effect. In addition, the hold display change common effect includes the hold display change common effect. When the hold display change effect is executed, first, the hold display change common effect that is executed in common when the display mode of the hold display is changed and when it is not changed is executed. The reserved display change common effect is, for example, displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 with an effect image showing a character (change effect character: for example, a character CH1 shown in FIG. It is only necessary to include an action effect that acts on the hold display corresponding to the variable display.

  The effect image showing the character CH1 in the reserved display change common effect is an example of the specific effect image. A promotion display image P shown in FIG. 74C described later is an example of the specific effect image. The effect image showing the character CH1 may be continuously displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 over a plurality of variable displays based on the setting corresponding to the determination result of executing the hold display change effect. The effect image indicating the character CH1 serving as the specific effect image only needs to be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side as viewed from the player rather than at least a part of the effect image indicating the decorative pattern serving as the identification information image. In this case, in the period in which the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 serving as the specific effect image is displayed at a position overlapping in front of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol. Let it be a stationary mode.

  The action effect in the hold display change common effect acts on either the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HL or the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HR, so that the display mode of the hold display is changed. Any display effect that suggests the possibility of a change may be used. Along with such a display effect, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a part or all of the light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are lit in a predetermined lighting mode, The movable member may be operated in a predetermined operation mode.

  When the hold display change success effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display exerted by the action effect is changed. Thus, after the action effect in the hold display change common effect is executed, the effect in which the display mode of the hold display that exerts the action changes is also called the hold change effect as the first success effect. On the other hand, when the hold display change failure effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display exerted by the action effect is not changed. As described above, the effect in which the action display in the hold display change common effect is executed but the display mode of the hold display in which the effect is exerted does not change is also referred to as a hold change change effect as the first failure effect.

  The effect of changing the display color of the hold display is also referred to as a display color change effect. The effect of changing the display mode of the hold display to a display mode indicating a predetermined message (for example, “secret”) is also referred to as a special display change effect.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” (“normal” A case where the variable display mode is “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”). When the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display state of the decorative design is not reached after the variable display of the decorative design is started. Reach combination) is stopped (derived). When the variable display mode is “reach”, the reach presentation is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display is started, and finally the jackpot combination is A predetermined combination of decorative symbols (reach combination) that is not to be displayed is stopped (derived). The non-reach combination and the decorative symbols constituting the reach combination may be included in the non-specific display result together with the special symbol that becomes the lost symbol.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial setting after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Processing for controlling the progress of the process is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

  As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern, The random number value MR5 for determining the figure display result may be included. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit gaming state. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It is a random value used for The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. The random value MR5 for determining the usual figure display result indicates that the second start winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is in a closed state (normally open) with the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary figure game as “per figure”. It is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control to an open state (expanded open state) where game balls are likely to pass (enter) more frequently than (state).

  In the special symbol process included in the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the special symbol display device 4 (first 1 special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B), various processes for performing control of display operation, special winning prize opening / closing operation setting of special variable winning ball device 7, etc. in a predetermined procedure. Is selected and executed. The normal symbol process process controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 to variably display the normal symbol, set the tilting operation of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the like. It is a process that enables. In the normal symbol process, as the high opening control accompanying the short-time control, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses a normal symbol change time (normal symbol variation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state. Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is “per normal” than in the normal state, the normal variable winning ball device based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal” Part or all of the control for making the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable blade piece in 6B longer than that in the normal state and the control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state are performed.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in the command control process, the output control board 12 among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects any one of the processes of S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102. Run.

  FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S101 of FIG. 45 as the start winning determination process. When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 46 is started, the CPU 103 first, based on a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on (S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not (4)) (S202). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), thereby It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the first special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in S202 (S202; No), the start port buffer value which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102 Is set to "1" (S203).

  When the first start port switch 22A is OFF in S201 (S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in S202 (S202; Yes), the normally variable winning ball apparatus Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by 6B, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON (S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (S204; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not (4)) (S205). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), thereby It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the number of second special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in S205 (S205; No), the starting port buffer value is set to “2” (S206).

  After either of the processes of S203 and S206 is executed, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be incremented by 1 (S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). Thus, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure hold memory number is updated to increase by 1. When the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure hold memory number is updated to increase by one. . At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (S208).

  After executing the process of S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start prize (S209). As an example, in the processing of S209, a random number value for determining a special figure display result from numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. Numeric data indicating the random number MR2 for determining MR1, the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. Numeric data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (S210).

  In the processing of S210, for example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data Is set in the second special figure storage unit. The first special figure holding storage unit is a special game (not yet started), although the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a first start winning is generated. The special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored as a hold memory. The second special figure holding storage unit is a special game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. (Special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored as a hold memory.

  The first special figure hold storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order of winning (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, for example, based on the establishment of the first start condition by the passage (entrance) of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc., as stored data, and storing them. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Based on whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state, whether the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, It is the stored storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to reach the reach of super reach. As described above, the first special figure storage unit has established the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, but has not yet started. Stored storage information of a special figure game in the first special symbol display device 4A.

  For example, the second special figure holding storage unit is associated with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. as the hold data and storing them. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Based on whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state, whether the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, It is the stored storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to reach the reach of super reach. As described above, the second special figure holding storage unit has established the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, but has not yet started. Stored storage information of a special figure game in the second special symbol display device 4B.

  Subsequent to the process of S210, settings for transmitting a start opening prize designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 are performed (S211). Subsequently, a winning random number determination process is executed (S212). Then, the setting for transmitting the reserved memory number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (S213). Further, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (S214; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (S215), and then the start winning determination process. Exit. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “1” (S214; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (S216), and then the processing of S204 is performed. Proceed to processing. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S212 of FIG. 46 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result is controlled as a “hit” in the special symbol normal process (S110 of FIG. 45, FIG. 50), which will be described later. Determination of whether or not to perform, determination of variation pattern, and the like are performed. On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process in S212 at the start winning timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Thus, it is determined whether or not the random symbol value MR1 is determined to derive the jackpot symbol as the special symbol display result, and the random value MR3 is determined to be the variation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state. Judgment is made whether or not there is. As a result, whether or not the special symbol display result becomes “big hit” before the variable symbol special symbol display or decorative symbol display based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the start prize opening is started. Whether to reach a reach state during variable display of symbols, and based on this prediction result, whether or not to execute a notice effect as a pre-read effect by the effect control CPU 120 on the effect control board 12 side or not Can be determined.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 47, the CPU 103 first checks the state of a time-short flag or a probability change flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102, for example. The current gaming state in the machine 1 is specified (S401). More specifically, when the probability change flag is ON, the gaming state is a probability change state, when the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON, the game state is a time reduction state, and both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are both What is necessary is just to specify that it is a normal state when it is OFF, respectively. Further, by checking the value of a special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag control unit) of the RAM 102, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit gaming state. It only needs to be identified.

  The CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state specified in this way is a big hit in which the big hit gaming state is set (S402). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit is not being made, it is further determined whether or not the high base in which the high opening control associated with the time reduction control is being performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (S403). When it is determined in S402 that the jackpot is being hit (S402; Yes), or when it is determined that the high base is being set in S403 (S403; Yes), whether or not the start port buffer value is “2”. Is determined (S404).

  When it is determined in S403 that the vehicle is not in the high base (S403; No), or when it is determined in S404 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (S404; Yes), the results are shown in FIG. Various variable display contents are determined using the random number value extracted in the process of S209. In this embodiment, the variable display contents to be determined at the time of winning a start are “big hit”, “super reach determination at the time of loss”, “reach determination at the time of loss”, and “general at the time of loss”.

  The CPU 101 sets a big hit determination range in order to determine whether or not the variable display content is “big hit”. For example, from a specific display result determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, data used for determining a special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state (special figure display result determination table data) ) Is selected. In this special figure display result determination table data, the range of the determined value assigned with the special figure display result “big hit” may be set as the big hit determination range. This jackpot determination range is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in the process of S209. At this time, if the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range, the variable display content is determined as “big hit”.

  Corresponding to the fact that the random display value MR1 is outside the range of the big hit determination range, and it is determined that the variable display content is not “big hit”, the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing is set. Regardless of the number of special figure hold memories, the super reach determination range and reach determination range at the time of losing can be determined as a random pattern that can be determined as a variation pattern with reach production including super reach or normal reach (disturbance for determining variation pattern). The range of the numerical value MR3) may be determined in advance.

  When variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a random pattern MR3 for determining a variation pattern and a variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance are prepared. Of the plurality of variation patterns, the variation pattern used in the current variable display is determined. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned to one of a plurality of variation patterns. The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern to which the determined value matching the random value MR3 is assigned as the variation pattern used in the current variable display. For example, in the variation pattern determination table used at the time of losing when the variable display result is “losing”, as shown in FIG. 53 (B1) and FIG. 53 (B2), assignment of determination values to a plurality of variation patterns is performed. It differs depending on the number of figure hold memory and the number of second special figure hold memory. However, some of the determined values are assigned to the same (or the same type) variation pattern regardless of the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number. The range of decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach among the decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach in the table data constituting such a variation pattern determination table. However, what is necessary is just to be predetermined as a super reach fixed range. In addition, in the table data constituting the variation pattern determination table, among the determined values allocated to the variation pattern with the reach effect including the normal reach, it is allocated to the variation pattern with the reach effect regardless of the number of special figure holding memories. The determined value range may be determined in advance as the reach determination range.

  FIG. 48 shows an example of determining a variation pattern at the time of losing when the variable display result is “losing”. When the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state without a time-saving control, a variation pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 53 (B1) are assigned to the variation pattern is used. In this case, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the first special figure reserved memory number. . On the other hand, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “271” to “300”, it is uncertain whether super-reach is involved or not according to the first special figure reserved memory number. It is determined that the change pattern is determined to have a reach effect including a normal reach regardless of at least the first special figure reserved memory number.

  In addition, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probabilistic change state with time reduction control or a time reduction state, a change pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 53 (B2) are assigned to the change patterns is used. It is done. In this case, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the second special figure reserved storage number. . On the other hand, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “289” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with normal reach is determined regardless of the second special figure reserved memory number. .

  The special figure hold memory number (the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number) when the start winning occurs coincides with the special figure hold memory number when the variable display is actually started. Not limited to this, there may be a change due to execution of variable display or generation of a new start prize after the start prize has occurred. For this reason, the table data selected due to the difference in the number of reserved special figure storage may not match between the determination result at the time of starting winning and the determination of the changing pattern at the start of variable display. It is generally difficult to predict whether or not to be determined. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is “losing”, the determination value assigned to at least the variation pattern with super reach or the variation pattern with reach effect including normal reach is the special value. A common decision value is included regardless of the number of stored figures. Therefore, whether or not it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the number of special figure holding memories at the time of starting winning or variable display start in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the reach effect including the normal reach It can be determined whether or not it is determined to be determined to be a variation pattern involving.

  When the variable display result is “losing” in the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, the variable display content If the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “271” to “300”, the variable display content is “reach determination at lose”. judge. If the variable display result is “losing” during the time reduction in which the time reduction control is being performed, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, the variable display content Is determined to be “super reach determination at the time of loss”, and if the random number knowledge MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “289” to “300”, the variable display content is “reach determination at the time of loss” judge.

  When it is determined in S404 shown in FIG. 47 that the starting port buffer value is “1” instead of “2” (S404; No), a setting for restricting determination at the time of winning in the process of S405 is performed (S406). ). Thus, when the high opening control accompanying the short-time control is performed or when the game is in the big hit gaming state, it is based on the occurrence of the starting winning (first starting winning) due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first starting winning opening. Restrict the variable display contents from being judged. Thus, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start is performed during the high opening control or the big hit gaming state. The soundness of the game can be ensured by restricting the pre-reading notice based on winning a prize from being executed.

  After that, the notification contents at the time of start winning according to the determination result by the process of S405 and the setting by the process of S406 are set (S407). In accordance with such notification contents, a setting for transmitting a winning determination result command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (S408), and the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 49 shows a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command and second starting opening winning designation command), a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command and second reserved memory number notification command), An example of setting a winning determination result command is shown. In this embodiment, a command B100H serving as a first start opening winning designation command and a command B200H serving as a second starting opening winning designation command are prepared in advance as start opening winning designation commands. Note that the subscript H indicates a hexadecimal number. In addition, as a reserved memory count notification command, a command C1XXH serving as a first reserved memory count notification command and a command C2XXH serving as a second reserved memory count notification command are prepared in advance. XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the reserved memory count notification command, different EXT data (for example, any one of 00H to 04H) is set according to the special figure reserved memory count. Further, a command C4XXH serving as a winning determination result command is prepared in advance.

  When the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) is generated, S202 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the first special figure holding storage number has not reached the upper limit value in the process of (1), the first start condition is established. The first start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “1” in the process of S203 shown in FIG. 46, and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of S211 to change from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, a first start opening winning designation command is transmitted. In addition, a winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the processing of S408 shown in FIG. Furthermore, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the process of S213 shown in FIG. The

  FIG. 46 shows a case where a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) is generated. When it is determined in step S205 that the second special figure reservation storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the second start condition is satisfied. The second start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “2” in the process of S206 shown in FIG. On the other hand, a second start opening winning designation command is transmitted. In addition, a winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the processing of S408 shown in FIG. Furthermore, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the process of S213 shown in FIG. The

  On the side of the production control board 12, it is possible to detect the establishment of the first start condition by receiving the first start opening prize designation command, and to detect the establishment of the second start condition by receiving the second start opening prize designation command. it can. Thus, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the first start condition. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the second start condition. The determination result command at the time of winning is when the first starting prize is detected when the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting prize opening or when the gaming ball has passed (entered) through the second start prize opening. At the time of the second start winning, the comparison result (the determination result at the time of winning) using the game random number extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like (the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result) is sent to the effect control board 12 side. To notify. The first reserved memory count notification command notifies the first special figure reserved memory count. The second reserved memory count notification command notifies the second special figure reserved memory count. In the present embodiment, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the game ball passes (enters) through either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Notifying whether it occurred, it is transmitted as hold notification information for designating which of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number has increased.

  The first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command correspond to the case where the execution of the special game is started when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be transmitted. Alternatively, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number addition designation command (the second reserved figure number designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted. Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, or together with the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, the total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number May be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  FIG. 49B exemplifies the contents of notification by a winning determination result command. Of the winning determination result commands shown in FIG. 49B, the command C402H, the command C403H, and the command C404H may be transmitted when the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot determination range. The winning determination result is notified that the variable display result is determined to be “losing” and is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range, and when the winning is determined that the variable display result is determined to be “hit” and controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The determination result (variable display content is “big hit”) is notified. The command C402H is transmitted when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the super-reach determination range at the time of losing, and the winning determination result (variable display content) that the variation pattern with super-reach is determined at the time of losing Will notify you of “Super reach when lost”. The command C403H is transmitted when the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the reach determination range at the time of losing, and the winning determination result (variable display content is determined to be a variation pattern with a reach effect at the time of losing. “Reach when lost”). The command C404H is transmitted when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is not within the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing, and when winning a prize that there is a possibility that the variation pattern with reach effect may not be determined Notification of the determination result (variable display content is “general when lost”). In this way, the winning determination result command uses the game random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or whether it is determined to a specific variation pattern. Is transmitted as determination result information for notifying the determination result at the time of winning.

  The special symbol normal process of S110 shown in FIG. 45 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display unit 4A, the second special symbol reservation storage unit, the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the like are stored on the basis of the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determined by the variable display result. Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined as one of a plurality of types. The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) One of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the deriving of the definite special symbol resulting in the variable display result is determined. The variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is “lost” in the variation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for performing a setting for varying the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4, a process for measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, and the like. . When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. This special symbol stop process includes a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to stop the change of the special symbol and to stop and display the confirmed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result. When the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, a setting for transmitting the symbol confirmation command to the effect control board 12 is performed as an effect control command capable of specifying that the display result in the variable display is derived. Then, it is determined whether or not a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “big hit” is set, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing of S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, etc., and the process for starting the execution of the round game in the big hit gaming state and setting the winning prize opening to the open state, etc. It is included. When the big hit release pre-processing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release process of S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit release post-processing in S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, it is determined whether or not the number of round games executed with the big winning opening opened has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, “2” or “15” depending on the type of jackpot). And the process of waiting until the next round game is started when the upper limit number has not been reached. When the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. Is updated.

  The big hit end process of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until time elapses, processing that performs various settings for controlling to the probability variation state and the time-short state corresponding to success or failure of the probability variation control condition, and the like are included. Then, when the setting for controlling to the probability change state or the time reduction state is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 45 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 50, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (S231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 only has to read the second reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in S231 (S231; No), it is stored in the head area (storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Numeric data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out as pending data (S232). Thereby, the game random number extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning (second start winning) at the second start winning opening in the process of S209 shown in FIG. 46 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Following the processing of S232, for example, by updating the second reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating it, the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory unit The stored contents are shifted (S233). For example, the second special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Further, in the process of S233, the total number of reserved memories may be updated by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to “2” (S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in S231 (S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 only has to read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of S235 is executed when it is determined in S231 that the second special figure hold memory number is “0”, and whether or not the first special figure hold memory number is “0”. Determine whether. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  When the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls have passed (entered) the start winning opening regardless of whether the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, A start area data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the start prize opening or the second start prize opening is associated with the hold number or separately from the hold data, and is associated with the hold number in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 And the order in which the start conditions are established can be specified for the special game corresponding to each hold data.

  Following the processing of S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory unit is updated. The stored content is shifted (S237). For example, the first special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Further, in the process of S237, the total number of reserved memories may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (S238).

  After executing one of the processes of S234 and S238, the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (S239). As an example, in the process of S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As long as it is assigned. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read from the variation random number buffer. When the special symbol display result is determined to be “big hit” in the process of S239, the special symbol display result derived in the special symbol game becomes the big hit symbol as the specific display result, and the decorative symbol variable display After the display result derived in the above becomes a definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player. In this way, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player by executing the process of S239.

  In the process of S239, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state and the probability variation control is performed, the special figure is displayed at a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the time reduction state. The result is determined as “big hit”. The probability change state is started when the probability change flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise accuracy” by the big hit end processing in S117 shown in FIG. 45, for example. The When the probability variation state is in effect, the special figure display result is likely to be a “hit” and more likely to be a big hit gaming state than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state.

  The CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of S239 is “big hit” (S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (S240; Yes), a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is set to an on state (S241). Also, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types (S242). As an example, in the process of S242, a big hit type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the big hit type. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value for determining the big jackpot type includes a plurality of jackpot types. It suffices if it is assigned to the determination result of either type. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 read from the variation random number buffer.

  After executing the processing of S242, the big hit type is stored (S243). The CPU 103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control buffer setting unit).

  If the special symbol display result is not “big hit” in S240 (S240; No), or after executing the processing of S243, the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined (S244). ). As an example, if it is determined in S240 that the special symbol display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, one of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is selected according to the determination result of the big hit type in S242. What is necessary is just to determine a fixed special symbol.

  After executing the process of S244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (S245), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in S245, and the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process of S111 shown in FIG. 45 is executed.

  In S235, when the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (S246), the special symbol normal process is performed. finish. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in S111 of FIG. 45 as the variation pattern setting processing. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 51, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (S261). If the big hit flag is ON (S261; Yes), a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (S262). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (S261; No), the variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss when the special figure display result is “lost” is determined (S263).

  In the process of S262, for example, the big hit fluctuation pattern is determined using a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the big hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern reading read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. What is necessary is just to determine a fluctuation pattern. In the process of S263, for example, a variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined using a loss variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “lost” by referring to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern random number MR3 read from the variation random number buffer. What is necessary is just to determine a fluctuation pattern.

  FIG. 52 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special drawing display result) is “lost”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” that does not reach the reach state, and the “reach” state that reaches the reach state. ], And a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in correspondence with the case where the variable display result (special drawing display result) is “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as a non-reach loss variation pattern), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “reach” is This is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a reach loss variation pattern). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in super reach is executed.

  FIG. 53 shows an example of determining a big hit variation pattern or a loss variation pattern. In the process of S262 shown in FIG. 51, for example, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 53A, any one of the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 to fluctuation pattern PA3-3 and the fluctuation pattern PB3-1 to fluctuation pattern PB3-4 is used at a predetermined rate as the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit. To be determined. In the process of S263 shown in FIG. 51, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. 53 (B1), for example, at the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed. In the process of S263 shown in FIG. 51, when the time reduction control is being performed, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. 53 (B2), for example. In the process of S263, by determining the variation pattern at the time of losing, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is to be the reach state when the variable display result is “losing”. It should be noted that whether or not to reach the reach state may be determined when the variable display result is “lost” by a process separate from the determination of the variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53A, the determined values assigned to the variation patterns with reach effects in super reach, such as the variation pattern PB3-1 to variation pattern PB3-4, are the variation pattern PA3-1 to variation pattern. It is set to be larger than the determined value assigned to the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the normal reach such as PA3-3. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (B1) or 53 (B2), the determined values assigned to the variation patterns with the reach effect in the normal reach, such as the variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, vary. It is set to be larger than the determined values assigned to the variation patterns accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach such as the patterns PB2-1 to PB2-4. As a result, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) is increased.

  The determination example shown in FIG. 53 (B1) includes determination values that are assigned to different variation patterns depending on whether the first special figure reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. As a specific example, the determined value in the range of “151” to “180” is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-1 if the first special figure reserved memory number is 0, and the first special figure reserved memory number is 1. If it is, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-2, and if the first special figure reservation storage number is 2 or more, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-3. With such a setting, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be varied according to the number of first special symbol reservations stored. In particular, when the first special figure reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “2”), the average variable display time is shortened compared to when the first special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern so that In normal times when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the first special figure reservation memory number is a predetermined value (for example, “0”) regardless of the second special figure reservation memory number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data. Alternatively, regardless of the second special figure holding memory number when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, refer to the table data corresponding to the first special figure holding memory number at that time. The variation pattern may be determined. Alternatively, in response to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, regardless of the second special figure holding memory number, FIG. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data that is different from the determination value B1). Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the “first special figure reserved memory number” shown in FIG. 53 (B1) is read as the “second special figure reserved memory number”. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage number.

  The determination example shown in FIG. 53 (B2) includes determination values that are assigned to different variation patterns depending on whether the second special figure reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. With such a setting, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be varied according to the number of second special symbol hold memories. In particular, when the second special figure reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “2”), the average variable display time is shortened compared to when the second special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern so that During the time-saving control, the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening, and the special game using the second special figure is frequently executed. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is short. The possibility of being executed is high, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. When the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is zero. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure reservation memory number is a predetermined value (for example, “0”) regardless of the first special figure reservation memory number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data that is different from the determination value allocation shown in FIG. 53 (B2) regardless of the first special figure reservation storage number. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the “second special figure reserved memory number” shown in FIG. 53 (B2) is read as the “first special figure reserved memory number”. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the first special figure reserved storage number.

  After executing one of the processes of S262 and S263, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time is set (S264). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in FIG. 52, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation time is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern in the processes of S262 and S263. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is derived by setting the special symbol variation time.

  Following the process of S264, a start condition is selected from the special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special graphic game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special-figure games in which is established (S265). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of S265 is executed, command transmission is set at the start of the special symbol fluctuation (S266). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, a first variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the second variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated.

  The first variation start command and the second variation start command use the variation start in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect control command for designating the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The first variation start command and the second variation start command are also simply referred to as variation start commands. The variation pattern designation command is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative design. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

  After executing the process of S266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (S267), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in S267, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process of S112 shown in FIG. 45 is executed.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process shown in FIG. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S 51), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and CTC (counter mounted on the production control board 12. / Timer circuit) register settings, etc. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (S52). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (S52; No), it waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (S52; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed (S54). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  As an example, in the command analysis process, when there is a reception command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, it is determined which effect control command is received by checking the MODE data of the received command. . At this time, when the winning determination result command and the first reserved memory number notification command are received together with the first start opening winning designation command, a first area provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 122 or the like. The first start opening winning designation command and the first reserved storage number notification command are sequentially stored in the storage area having the smallest reserved display number serving as the buffer number among the free areas in the start winning command buffer. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second start opening prize designation command, the empty area in the second start prize command buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 122 or the like. Among them, the second start opening winning designation command and the second reserved storage number notification command are stored in order in the storage area having the smallest reserved display number serving as the buffer number.

  The first start prize command buffer is associated with one set of effect control commands (first start slot prize designation command and first reserved memory number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first start prize. A storage area is reserved for storage. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the first start winning is generated, corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the first start winning command buffer according to the receiving order. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area. The hold display number in the first start winning command buffer corresponds to the first special figure hold memory number.

  The second start prize command buffer is associated with one set of effect control commands (second start opening prize designation command and second reserved memory number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second start prize. A storage area is reserved for storage. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the second start winning is generated, in accordance with the reception order, corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the second start winning command buffer. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area. The hold display number in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the second special figure hold memory number.

  After executing the command analysis process, an effect control process is executed (S55). In the effect control process, for example, various operations such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are performed. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed. Following the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed (S56), and numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter in the RAM 122 is updated by software as various random values used for effect control. To do.

  Subsequently, when an abnormality notification command included in the effect control command is received from the main board 11, an error notification process (S57) for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is executed according to the command. In the error notification process, for example, an error image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is displayed on the image display device 5 under control of the effect control CPU 120, or a sound for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or output. After execution of the error notification process, the process returns to S52.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (D1), which will be described later, the error image may be displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 (full screen display), or in FIG. 59 (D2). As shown, it may be displayed on a part of the display area of the image display device 5 (partial display). Also, for example, if the abnormality notification command indicates an abnormal winning, an error image is displayed in a full-screen display mode, and the abnormality notification command indicates a ball removal error (the game ball stored in the lower plate has a specified amount). The display mode of the error image may be changed according to the type (severity) of the error, such as displaying in a partial display mode if it indicates an error when exceeding).

  In this embodiment, the error image is not erased from the image display device 5 until the error indicated by the abnormality notification command is resolved. Therefore, the error image is not erased during the derivation display of the variable display result (see FIG. 59 (D2)), and the display of the error image has priority over the display of the adjustment result image R described later. . In the present embodiment, as described later, the volume as a production effect can be adjusted by the player's operation, but the error sound cannot be adjusted with the initial setting. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player or the game store clerk from noticing the occurrence of the error even though some error has occurred.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 55, first, a change effect character display process is executed (S162). The change effect character display processing is for displaying an effect image showing the character in the hold display change common effect on the screen of the image display device 5 based on the setting according to the determination result of executing the hold display change effect. Includes processing. The change effect character display processing includes processing for determining whether or not a variation start command (first variation start command or second variation start command) or a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received, This includes processing for performing display control of the effect image indicating the character according to the determination result.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect character display process executed in S162 of FIG. In the change effect character display process shown in FIG. 56, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the character is being displayed (S601). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the character is being displayed when the effect image indicating the character CH1 (change effect character) shown in FIG. 57B used in the hold display change common effect is displayed. That's fine.

  If the character is not being displayed in S601 (S601; No), it is determined whether there is a change effect setting (S602). For example, if the CPU 120 for effect control specifies the storage contents of the hold display change pattern and the change effect timing pattern in the hold display data storage unit and information corresponding to the determination result of executing the hold display change effect is stored, It may be determined that there is a change effect setting. If there is no change effect setting (S602; No), the change effect character display process is terminated.

  When the change effect is set in S602 (S602; Yes), the effect image indicating the change effect character is controlled to start display on the screen of the image display device 5 (S603). The change effect character display process is terminated. In the process of S603, the effect control CPU 120 may change the display mode of the change effect character according to the determination result of whether or not the decorative symbol is being variably displayed. Whether or not the decorative design is being variably displayed may be specified from the value of the effect process flag provided in a predetermined area (effect control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 122. More specifically, when the value of the effect process flag is “2”, it may be determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed. On the other hand, when the value of the effect process flag is other than “2”, it may be determined that the decorative symbol is not being variably displayed. When it is determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, a display control command for instructing to change the display mode of the change effect character to the action mode is output to the VDP of the display control unit 123, for example. On the other hand, when it is determined that the decorative symbols are not being variably displayed, a display control command for instructing to change the display mode of the change effect character to the static mode is output to the VDP of the display control unit 123, for example.

  The action mode may be a display position, a size, a rotation amount, a moving direction, a moving speed, a moving amount of a change effect character, a part of the shape, pattern, or color of the change effect character according to an animation pattern prepared in advance. All may be a display mode of change display (operation display) that changes over time. The change of the change effect character according to the animation pattern may be repeated at a predetermined cycle. In contrast to such an action mode, the static mode may be a static display mode in which the change effect character does not change over time. In contrast to the stationary mode, the action mode is also referred to as a non-static mode or a behavior mode.

  The effect image indicating the change effect character whose display is started by executing the process of S603 is a character used for the action effect in the hold display change effect (for example, the character CH1 as shown in FIG. 57B). It is an image which shows. By performing the process of S603, the effect image indicating the change effect character can be displayed even before the variable display in which the hold display change effect is executed. In this case, the effect image indicating the change effect character can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 over a plurality of variable displays.

  If the character is being displayed in S601 (S601; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined display end timing (S604). The display end timing is, for example, when the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, when the execution of the reach effect in the super reach is started, or when the execution of the hold display change effect by the hold display change pattern is ended. Any timing may be used as long as a predetermined display end condition of the change effect character is satisfied. When it is the display end timing (S604; Yes), the effect image indicating the character CH1 as the change effect character is controlled to end the display on the screen of the image display device 5 (S605), and then the change is performed. The effect character display process is terminated.

  If it is not the change end timing (S604; No), it is determined whether or not a change start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S606). In the processing of S606, it may be determined that a variation start command has been received when either the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received. If a change start command has been received (S606; Yes), after setting for starting display control during change (S607), the change effect character display process is terminated. In the process of S607, for example, when it is determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed in the process of S603, a display control command for instructing to change the display mode of the change effect character to the action mode is displayed. What is necessary is just to output with respect to VDP of the part 123. Thereby, the display mode of the effect image which shows the character for change effects can be made into an action mode by reception of the change start command which can specify the start of variable display.

  If no change start command is received in S606 (S606; No), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S608). If no symbol confirmation command is received (S608; No), the change effect character display process is terminated. On the other hand, when the symbol confirmation command is received (S608; Yes), after the setting for starting the symbol confirmation display control is performed (S609), the change effect character display processing is terminated. In the process of S609, for example, in the case where it is determined in the process of S603 that it is determined that the decorative symbol is not being variably displayed, a display control command for instructing the display mode of the change effect character to be a static mode is displayed. What is necessary is just to output with respect to VDP of the part 123. Thereby, in the period when the display result in variable display is derived | led-out, the display mode of the effect image which shows the character for change effects can be made into a static mode.

  FIG. 57 shows an example of specific settings for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. 57A shows a configuration example of a Z value setting table for assigning Z values to a plurality of display layers. FIG. 57B shows an arrangement example of each display layer based on the Z value setting by the Z value setting table. In the present embodiment, the plurality of layers include an error display layer, a small symbol display layer, an adjustment result image display layer, a full screen preview display layer, a change effect display layer, a decorative symbol display layer, and a symbol preview display layer. Yes. An error display effect image is drawn on the error display layer. In the small symbol display layer, an effect image showing a small symbol variably displayed in the small symbol display area 5V is drawn. When the volume is adjusted, an adjustment result image R indicating the volume adjustment result is drawn on the adjustment result image display layer. In the full screen preview display layer, a full screen preview display image used for the full screen preview effect is drawn. In the change effect display layer, an effect image indicating a character or the like used in the hold display change effect is drawn. In the decorative symbol display layer, an effect image showing the decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is drawn. In the symbol notice display layer, an image of the symbol notice display used in the symbol notice effect is drawn. The image of the symbol preview display only needs to be a preview display related to the decorative symbol. In this embodiment, for example, an image G positioned around the decorative symbol and having a display form such as an aura (afterglow) of the decorative symbol is used. Yes. In the image data of the effect image drawn on each display layer, a Z value that is a depth value used when drawing each effect image in a superimposed manner is set. An error display layer, a small symbol display layer, an adjustment result image display layer, a full screen notice display layer, a change effect display layer, a decorative symbol display layer by setting the Z value by the Z value setting table as shown in FIG. The Z value of the effect image drawn on each of the symbol preview display layers has a different value depending on the display layer on which the effect image is drawn.

  For example, the VDP of the display control unit 123 may determine the priority by performing a Z value comparison operation when writing image data read from the CGROM into a frame buffer of the VRAM. Then, the image data of the effect image having a small Z value is written in the frame buffer in preference to the image data of the effect image having a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with a small value as the Z value has a higher priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with a large value as the Z value. Can be placed on the side.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (B), the error image display layer sets the Z value so that it is arranged on the foremost side, so that the priority of the error image (see FIGS. 59 (D1) and (D2)). Is set higher than other effect images. In addition, the Z value is set so that the small symbol display layer is arranged on the front side next to the error display layer as seen from the player. Therefore, even when a display effect is displayed by displaying an arbitrary effect image on the screen of the image display measure 5, the small symbol variable display in the small symbol display area 5V is always performed unless it overlaps the error image. The player can see it. In addition, the Z value is set so that the adjustment result image display layer is arranged on the front side next to the small symbol display layer. As a result, the adjustment result image R indicating the adjustment result of the sound volume can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side from the image of the full screen notice display, the effect image indicating the decorative design, and the like. Also, the Z value is set so that the full-screen preview display layer is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display layer. Thereby, the full-screen preview image used in the full-screen preview effect can be arranged at an overlapping position in front of the effect image showing the decorative design, and the decorative design can be hidden. Note that the Z value may be set so that the full-screen preview display layer is arranged in front of the adjustment result image display layer. The change effect display layer is on the rear side of the small symbol display layer, but the Z value is set so as to be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display layer. Thereby, the effect image used by the hold display change effect can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative design. In this way, the effect image indicating the change effect character can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative design that is the identification information image. Also, the Z value is set so that the symbol preview display layer is arranged next to the decorative symbol display layer. As a result, the symbol preview image used in the symbol preview effect can be arranged in an overlapping position on the rear side of the effect image showing the decorative symbol, and a display for decorating the decorative symbol from the back (for example, an aura display of the decorative symbol) )It can be performed.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process executed in S163 of FIG. In the present embodiment, by performing the effect effect setting process described below, the game can be performed during the game (see FIGS. 59A1 and A2) or during the customer waiting demonstration display (see FIG. 59B). The volume as a production effect can be adjusted by the user's adjustment operation. When the volume is adjusted, the adjustment result image R indicating the volume adjustment result is displayed in a manner in which the effect image and the demo image are superimposed on a predetermined area of the image display device 5. The adjustment result image R is displayed, for example, in the form of a bar graph that increases or decreases in the left-right direction, as shown in FIGS. 59 (A1), (A2), (B), and (C2). Note that the mode of the adjustment result image R is arbitrary as long as the player or the like can recognize the current volume, and may be a mode in which numerical values or characters corresponding to the volume are displayed, a pie chart mode, or the like.

  In this embodiment, during the menu mode, the item “volume adjustment” is selected from the menu screen (see FIG. 59 (C1)), and the volume adjustment mode is being selected (see FIG. 59 (C2)). Only when the volume can be adjusted. While the volume adjustment mode is selected, the adjustment result image R is always displayed. In addition, as will be described later, in response to receiving a predetermined operation during the customer waiting demonstration display, the mode shifts from the customer waiting demonstration display to the menu mode.

  When the effect effect setting process shown in FIG. 58 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the menu mode is being executed (S701). For example, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the menu mode is being executed if the menu mode execution flag is on, and determines that the menu mode is not being executed if the flag is off. Note that the menu mode execution flag is set to an on state in S662 described later, and cleared to an off state in S661 (see FIG. 61).

  When the menu mode is not being executed (S701; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (S702). The adjustment result image display flag is set to an on state in S708 and S715, which will be described later, and cleared to an off state in S704 and S712.

  When the adjustment result image display flag is on (S702; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period T1 that has been determined in advance has elapsed since the adjustment operation was received (S703). Here, the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) is an operation performed by the player using an operation means such as a stick controller 31A, and is an operation for adjusting the sound volume as a production effect in the present embodiment. The player adjusts the volume from within a predetermined range (for example, six levels 1 to 6) by tilting the stick controller 31A to the left and right, for example, and the volume at the point when the tilt operation is stopped. The volume is determined as an adjustment result.

  Note that the sound volume determination operation may be performed by pushing and pulling the trigger button of the stick controller 31A or pushing the push button 31B separately from the adjustment operation. Further, the operation means for adjusting the volume is not limited to the stick controller 31A, and may be a cross button or a dial-type operation means (not shown). Further, instead of the operation means, a non-contact type sensor (for example, a photo sensor) may be used to adjust the effect by adjusting the player's adjustment detected by the sensor.

  The predetermined period T1 is set in advance as a display period of the adjustment result image R indicating the adjustment result of the volume. The predetermined period T1 is arbitrary as long as it is an appropriate period for the player to confirm the adjustment result, and is set to about several seconds (for example, 2 to 10 seconds) in this embodiment. Whether or not the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the adjustment operation was accepted corresponds to, for example, a predetermined timer corresponding to the predetermined period T1 when it is determined that there is an adjustment operation (S706; Yes) in S706 described later. Just set a value and determine if the timer has timed out.

  The adjustment operation (adjustment operation) may be an operation for adjusting the display luminance (light quantity) of the image display device 5 or the effect effect lamp as an effect. Then, the adjustment result image R may indicate a luminance adjustment result. Moreover, what is necessary is just to adjust at least one of a volume and a brightness | luminance according to adjustment operation. Further, the predetermined period during which the adjustment result image corresponding to the volume is displayed and the predetermined period during which the adjustment result image according to the luminance is displayed may be set to the same length or set to different lengths. May be.

  In S703, when the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the adjustment operation was accepted (S703; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 deletes the adjustment result image R from the image display device 5, and turns off the adjustment result image display flag. The state is cleared (S704). With the process of S704, the adjustment result image R is erased when a predetermined period T1 has elapsed from the adjustment operation during a game or a demonstration display. Subsequent to the processing of S704, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of S706. Also, if the determination at S702 or S703 is No, the process at S706 is executed.

  In S701, when the menu mode is being executed (S701; Yes), if the volume adjustment mode is being selected (S705; Yes), the processing of S706 is executed. For example, the production control CPU 120 determines that the volume adjustment mode is selected if the volume adjustment mode selection flag is on, and determines that the volume adjustment mode is not selected if the flag is off. The volume adjustment mode selection flag is set to an on state in S664 described later, and cleared to an off state in a predetermined case. For example, when a mode selection other than volume adjustment is made during execution of the menu mode, or when the menu mode execution flag is turned off, the volume adjustment mode selection flag is cleared to the off state. When the volume adjustment mode is selected (S705; Yes), the adjustment result image R is always displayed without performing the process of S704. Even in the demonstration display, the adjustment result image R may not be erased even after the predetermined period T1 has elapsed. Even if the menu mode is being executed (S701; Yes), if the volume adjustment mode is not being selected (S705; No), the effect setting process is terminated.

  In S706, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an adjustment operation has been performed. For example, when an operation signal from the stick controller 31A (for example, an operation signal indicating a tilting operation in the left-right direction) is input, the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is an adjustment operation (S706; Yes) and performs the adjustment operation. The corresponding volume setting value is stored in a setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 (S707). Even in the process of S707, the volume setting value for the error sound stored in the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 is not changed and remains the initial setting value.

  Subsequently, the CPU 120 for effect control causes the image display device 5 to display the adjustment result image R that notifies the volume setting value according to the adjustment operation, and sets the adjustment result image display flag to the on state (S708). If the adjustment result image R is already displayed (Yes in S702, No in S703, Yes in S706), the adjustment result image for notifying the volume setting value according to the current adjustment operation. R is displayed on the image display device 5 (updated and displayed from the adjustment result image R corresponding to the previous adjustment operation), and the adjustment result image display flag is kept on.

  After the execution of the process of S708 or when it is determined that there is no adjustment operation in the process of S706 (S706; No), the process of S710 is executed.

  In S710, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the variable display result derivation display period T2 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “derivation display period”). For example, the effect control CPU 120 is in an on state when starting a process of completely stopping and displaying (determining and displaying) a confirmed decorative symbol as a final stop symbol that is a variable display result of a decorative symbol in a later-described variable display effect processing. Whether or not it is the derivation display period T2 is determined based on a flag that is set to be cleared to an off state when the processing is completed. The derived display period T2 corresponds to the display period of the final stop symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol, and is set to about several seconds (for example, 0.5 to 1 second). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the derived display period T2 is shorter than the predetermined period T1 described above. Note that the derivation display period T2 does not have to be constant, and may be set so that, for example, the time-short state is shorter than the normal state.

  When it is the derivation display period T2 for the variable display result (S710; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (S711), and if it is on (S711; Yes), the adjustment result image R is deleted, and the adjustment result image display flag is cleared to an off state (S712). Thus, even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed since the adjustment operation, the adjustment result image R is deleted during the derived display period T2 (see FIGS. 60A and 60B described later).

  On the other hand, when it is not the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result (S710; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (S713). If it is off, that is, if the adjustment result image R is not displayed (S713; No), the process of S714 is executed.

  In the process of S714, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display derivation display period T2 has elapsed and is within the predetermined period T1 (whether the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed). When the derivation display period T2 has elapsed and is within the predetermined period T1 (S714; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 returns (displays again) the adjustment result image R and turns on the adjustment result image display flag. The state is set (S715). Thereby, even if the adjustment result image R has been deleted in the process of S712, not the derived display period T2 (S710; No), but the derived display period T2 has elapsed but is within the predetermined period T1 (S714; Yes) ), The adjustment result image R is restored and displayed as shown in FIG.

  When the determination is YES in S713, the determination is NO in S705, S711, and S714, or after execution of S712 and S715, the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect effect setting process.

  If the adjustment result image R is erased during the derivation display period T2, the adjustment operation is invalidated or the volume setting corresponding to the adjustment operation is invalidated without going through the processing of S706 or S707. May be. Further, the volume setting value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 may be configured to return to the default (initial setting value) at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, after a specific change, after a change is executed a specific number of times, a customer waiting demo display return timing, or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted. In addition, a plurality of types having different lengths are prepared for the predetermined period T1, and may be used for each gaming state, for example. For example, the predetermined period may be 10 seconds in the short time state, and the predetermined period may be 5 seconds in the normal state.

  Here, a main example when the adjustment result image R is erased in the derived display period T2 will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, the predetermined period T1 is the display period of the adjustment result image R from the time when the most recent adjustment operation is performed, but at least a part of the predetermined period T1 and the derived display period T2 Are overlapped, the adjustment result image R is deleted (corresponding to S712). The example shown in FIG. 60A is a case where the derived display period T2 overlaps the rear end of the predetermined period T1, and in this case, the adjustment result image R is not displayed until the next adjustment operation is performed. On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 60B is a case where the derivation display period T2 is within the predetermined period T1, and in this case, when the derivation display period T2 ends, the adjustment result image R is displayed again (in S715). The display continues until the predetermined period T1 elapses. Although not shown, when the derived display period T2 overlaps the front end of the predetermined period T1, the adjustment result image R is displayed after the end of the derived display period T2. Thus, according to the present embodiment, since the adjustment result image R is erased during the derived display period T2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 59A1 is a display example of the adjustment result image R during the game. During the game, the adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right corner of the image display device 5. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59A1, the display area of the adjustment result image R is a decorative display area Ar (an area including the decorative display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). It overlaps with a part. FIG. 59 (A2) is an example of display of the adjustment result image R particularly during the full screen notice, and the adjustment result image R is displayed over the full screen notice display. Note that the adjustment result image R may not be displayed during the full screen notice. If the adjustment result image R is displayed during such an effect period, the interest of the full-screen notice effect may be reduced. Therefore, the adjustment result image R is not displayed during the full-screen notice, but may be adjustable. Or adjustment may be impossible.

  FIG. 59B is a display example of the adjustment result image R during demonstration display (during customer demonstration display). During the demonstration display, as shown in the figure, for example, an image indicating that the customer waiting demonstration such as “demo display is being displayed” is displayed on the image display device 5 and when an adjustment operation is performed. The adjustment result image R is superimposed on the demonstration display image.

  FIG. 59C1 is a display example of the menu screen in the menu mode. In the present embodiment, during the menu mode, the player performs a volume adjustment mode selection operation, and the volume adjustment is possible only when the screen is switched to the volume adjustment mode selection screen shown in FIG. 59 (C2). It has become. Selection of an item in the menu mode can be performed, for example, by tilting the stick controller 31A, and the trigger button of the stick controller 31A is pushed or pushed with the “volume adjustment” item selected, or the push button 31B is pressed. By pressing the button, the screen changes to a screen in which the volume adjustment mode is selected as shown in FIG. 59 (C2). The operation means for selecting an item is not limited to the stick controller 31A, and may be a cross button (not shown). Note that the display form of the adjustment result image R may be different between the game shown in FIGS. 59A1 and 59A and the volume adjustment mode selected in FIG. 59C2. For example, when the volume adjustment mode is selected, the adjustment result image R may be displayed larger than in the game, or may be displayed in the center of the image display device 5.

  59 (D1) and (D2) are examples of error images that can be displayed in the error notification process (S57) as described above. In this embodiment, the error images are (i) derivation of variable display results. It is not erased during display, and (ii) is displayed with priority over the adjustment result image R.

  After performing the effect setting process in S163 shown in FIG. 55, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122, the following S170 to S175 are performed. Select one of these processes and execute it.

  The variable display start waiting process in S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process starts variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 based on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command from the main board 11 is received. The process etc. which determine whether or not are included. When the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process of S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform the variable display of decorative symbols and other various effects, the process of determining the fixed decorative symbols and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbols and the type of display result is included. . When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 performs various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122. , And various kinds of effect control during the variable display of the decorative design are included. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11, the finalized symbol as the final stop symbol resulting in the variable symbol variable display result is displayed as a complete stop. A process of (derived display) is included. Note that, in response to the end code being read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the finalized decorative symbol may be displayed in a complete stop (derived display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, it is autonomous on the side of the production control board 12 without using the production control command from the main board 11. The fixed display pattern can be derived and displayed on the screen to determine the variable display result. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process when the attacker is released. On the other hand, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is initialized. The value is updated to “0”.

  The effect process when the attacker is released in S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this attacker opening effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And various effect operations in a predetermined period in which the grand prize winning door as an attacker is opened, such as turning on, turning off, and blinking the decoration LED. In the attacker opening effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process of S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration are output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect controls such as turning on, turning off, and blinking the LED are executed at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S170 of FIG. 55 as variable display start waiting processing. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command reception flag is in an ON state (S651). If the variation pattern designation command reception flag is on (S651; Yes), the variation pattern designation command reception flag is cleared to an off state (S652). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to a value “1” corresponding to the variable display start setting process (S171) (S653).

  If the variation pattern designation command reception flag is not on (that is, the variation pattern designation command has not been received) (S651; No), the effect control CPU 120 is displaying the customer waiting demonstration (customer waiting demonstration). It is determined whether or not (S654). Whether or not the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed may be determined based on, for example, a customer waiting demonstration displaying flag that is set to an on state in accordance with the execution of S658 described later.

  If the customer waiting demonstration is not being displayed (S654; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag is on (S655). When the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag is on (that is, the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received) (S655; Yes), the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command. It is determined whether the elapsed time has passed 30 seconds (S656). Whether or not the elapsed time after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command has passed 30 seconds is determined by, for example, turning on the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag in the command analysis process (S54) shown in FIG. When the state is set, a value corresponding to 30 seconds may be set in a predetermined timer, and it may be determined whether or not the timer has timed out.

  If 30 seconds have elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command (S656; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 turns off the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag (S657) and at the image display device 5. A predetermined customer waiting demonstration display is started (S658). The customer waiting demonstration display is not limited to a mode of displaying a character string such as “Demo Displaying” as shown in FIG. 59 (B), and is arbitrary, for example, a predetermined initial appearance (for example, “123”). Or a combination of symbols reminiscent of a big hit such as “777”), a predetermined character, or a logotype of a gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the customer waiting demonstration display is started at the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the customer waiting demonstration specifying command (corresponding to the case where the variable display is interrupted) is shown. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started at the timing when 20 seconds or one minute has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Further, for example, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started immediately upon reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command.

  Following the process of S658, or when the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed (S654; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there has been a menu switching operation (S659). The menu switching operation is, for example, a push-down operation of the push button 31B that can be accepted during the customer waiting demonstration display. Judge that there was. The operation means that can accept the menu switching operation is arbitrary, and is not limited to the push button 31B.

  When there is a menu switching operation, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the menu mode execution flag is on (S660). If the menu mode execution flag is off (S660; No), the customer waiting demonstration display is deleted and the menu display is started (the display on the image display device 5 is changed from FIG. 59 (B) to FIG. 59 (C1)). The menu mode execution flag is set to the on state (S662). On the other hand, if the menu mode execution flag is ON (S660; Yes), the menu display is erased and the customer waiting demonstration display is restored (the display on the image display device 5 is changed from FIG. 59 (C1) to FIG. 59 (B). The menu mode execution flag is cleared to the off state (S661).

  Subsequent to the processing of S662, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a volume adjustment mode selection operation has been performed (S663). Whether or not the volume adjustment mode selection operation has been performed is determined, for example, by whether or not an operation signal is input from an operation unit that receives the operation (such as the trigger button of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B as described above). do it. When there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation (S663; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the volume adjustment mode selection flag to the on state (S664). After execution of S653, S661, and S664, or in the case of No determination in S655, S656, S659, and S663, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S171 of FIG. 55 as variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 62, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like to be a finalized symbol as a variable symbol display result (S321). As the processing of S321, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. The final stop symbol is determined. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and variable display result include “non-reach (loss)”, “reach (loss)”, “non-probability change (big hit)”, and “probability change (big hit)”. is there.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is “lost”. " When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes “losing”. . When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the short-time state. When the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big win”, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the probable state.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the production control CPU 120 uses the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R to display different (unmatched) decorative symbols as the final stop symbols. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left determined symbol that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores the left determined symbol determination table that is stored and prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. By referring to this, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. For example, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. From the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

  When the variable display content is “reach”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the same (matching) decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R as the final stop symbols. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining the left and right determined symbols that are updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores the left and right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referencing or the like, among the confirmed decorative symbols, decorative symbols having the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. decide. Further, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same (matching) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining the jackpot determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5, etc. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R is determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, etc. It is only necessary to determine which one of the design symbol to be displayed and the probability variation symbol (for example, a design symbol that represents an odd number) is the final design symbol. In the jackpot promotion promotion, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probable variation jackpot combination) that recalls a big hit in the image display device 5 but does not recall a probable change state (non-probable big hit combination) is once stopped and displayed in the big hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state. This is an effect of notifying whether or not the state is surely changed at the end of.

  As a specific example, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, a symbol to be a definite decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)” and it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative design is determined from a plurality of types of probability change designs. On the other hand, when the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Accordingly, it is only necessary to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed despite the fact that the probability variation symbols are all derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols, so that the player is not distrusted.

  In this way, by determining the final stop symbol corresponding to the variable display content by the process of S321, whether or not to control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the determined special symbol determination result in the special figure game The variable display result of the decorative design related to the determination result can be determined. Further, in the process of S321, a small symbol corresponding to the confirmed decorative symbol may be determined as a display result in the variable symbol variable display.

  In the process of S321, when the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, it is determined whether or not to execute a probable change promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect. May be. In the redrawing effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable big hit combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult to recognize or impossible to recognize that it is controlled to the probabilistic state, It is possible to notify that the control is changed to the probability variation state by variably displaying (revariing) the decoration symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probability variation big hit combination composed of the same probability variation symbol. Note that there is a case in which the control of the probability variation state is not notified when the decoration symbol of the non-probable variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed after the decoration symbol is re-variable in the re-lottery effect. If it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the process of S321, the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

  Following the determination of the final stop symbol or the like in the process of S321, a change effect setting process for performing execution setting of the hold display change effect is executed (S322). In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit. In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. You may do it.

  Subsequent to the process of S322, the effect control CPU 120 executes a full-screen notice effect setting process (S322A) for setting a full-screen notice effect as a predetermined notice effect. In the full-screen notice effect setting process, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (B2), a cover image such as a dark image DG is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 at the start of fluctuation, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern display mode. The execution setting of the notice effect (full screen notice effect) covering the entire screen such as the blackout effect is performed. Note that the cover image is not limited to the dark image DG or the black image, and may be an image of a predetermined color or pattern, such as a light emission mode image or a freeze mode image. Any image may be used as long as the decorative pattern display content is difficult to view or cannot be viewed. Further, the predetermined notice effect may be a panel type (panel display format) step-up notice, cut-in notice, story notice, mini game notice, development notice, etc., and the entire display area or part (at least a decorative pattern) The notice effect that is displayed on the part that can be hidden), and at least the decorative design (for example, the display form or display content of the decorative design) cannot be seen at all (the transparency is zero) and is invisible It may be a notice effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize, such as a display area or a decorative pattern being seen through (a low transparency). In addition, the process of S322A is set as “notice effect setting process”, and other notice effects other than the above-mentioned full screen notice effect, that is, other notice effects during variable display (step-up notice, serif notice, etc.) are simultaneously determined. You may make it do.

  Following the process of S322A, a symbol notice effect setting process (S322B) is executed. In the symbol notice effect setting process, for example, as shown in FIGS. 69 (B1) and (D2), an aura (rear light) image G of a predetermined color (for example, blue, green, red, etc.) is displayed around the decorative symbol. Execution setting of the notice effect (design notice effect) is performed. The symbol notice effect is not limited to the aura display, but may be a notice related to or attached to the decorative pattern (for example, a character notice in which a character appears or a background notice in which the background display mode changes). It is good also as a notice which changes the display mode (for example, color, shape, etc.) of itself into the display mode different from a usual decoration design. For example, in the case of a character notice, a plurality of character notices having different character costumes, sizes, poses, types, and the like may be provided, or a plurality of background notices having different background display forms may be provided.

  Subsequent to the process of S322B, a symbol reverse start display setting process (S322C) is executed. In the symbol reverse start display setting process, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1), for example, a specific direction (for example, a forward direction (downward direction) or the like) different from a predetermined direction (for example, forward direction (downward direction)) of the display area of the image display device 5 at the start of variation. The execution of the symbol reverse start display is performed such that the decorative symbol starts (starts fluctuation or displacement) in the reverse direction (upward direction, etc.) opposite to the forward direction. In the present embodiment, the predetermined direction in which the decorative symbols are variably (variably) displayed is the downward direction, but may be an upward direction, a left direction, a right direction, an oblique direction, a forward direction, a backward direction, and the like. Examples of the predetermined direction include a basic change direction, a direction in which identification information is mainly displaced in variable display, a change direction when there is no notice effect, a change direction that the player sees most (exclusively), The normal direction such as the fluctuation direction when the derived display is performed is included. In addition, the specific direction is the reverse direction (upward direction), but may be a direction other than the upward direction and different from the forward direction (for example, left direction, right direction, diagonal direction, forward direction, backward direction, etc.). In FIG. 62, the full screen notice effect setting process (S322A), the symbol notice effect setting process (S322B), and the symbol reverse start display setting process (S322C) are executed in this order, but in an order other than this order. There may be.

  Subsequent to the process of S322C, a symbol notice effect timing adjustment process (S322D) is executed. In the symbol notice effect timing adjustment process, when there is no full screen notice effect, the symbol notice effect timing is set at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 68 (A). As shown in FIG. 68 (B), adjustment is performed such that the symbol notice effect timing is changed after the full screen notice execution period.

  Following the process of S322D, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (S323). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects any one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special-figure change effect control patterns) corresponding to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command and uses it as the use pattern. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (display change effect control patterns) corresponding to the execution setting of the hold display change effect by the change effect setting process of S322, and uses pattern Set as.

  Subsequent to the process of S323, for example, an initial value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command ( S324). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (S325). At this time, for example, a display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (special-fluctuation effect control pattern) determined in the process of S323 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Thus, the variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5.

  Further, in the process of S325, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative symbol and starting the variation of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V is performed. Thus, in the small symbol display area 5V, when the decorative symbol variable display is started in synchronization with each of the special symbol game using the first special symbol and the special symbol game using the second special symbol. The variable display of symbols can also be started. In the small symbol display area 5V, a small symbol (first small symbol) whose variable display is started in synchronization with the special symbol game using the first special symbol and a special symbol game using the second special symbol. A small symbol (second small symbol) whose variable display is started in synchronization may be arranged separately. As an example, the first small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is arranged on the right side in the small symbol display area 5V, and corresponds to the special symbol game using the second special symbol. The second small symbol variably displayed may be arranged on the left side in the small symbol display area 5V. Thus, by confirming which one of the first small symbol and the second small symbol is variably displayed, which of the special game using the first special graphic and the special graphic game using the second special graphic is executed. It is only necessary for a player or the like to be able to identify whether the game is being played. When the first small symbol and the second small symbol are separately arranged, for example, based on a change start command transmitted from the main board 11, a special game using the first special graphic and the second special graphic are used. What is necessary is just to determine in which special display game variable display is started among the special figure games using. When the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the variable display of the first small symbol is started, while when the special figure game using the second special figure is started, the second special figure game is started. What is necessary is just to start the variable display of a small symbol. As described above, in the small symbol display area 5V, the effect image indicating the first small symbol that becomes the first notification information image is variably displayed in synchronization with the special symbol game using the first special symbol, and the display result is derived. The display result may be derived by performing variable display of the effect image indicating the second small symbol that becomes the second notification information image in synchronization with the special game using the second special figure.

  After the process of S325 is executed, the first hold display of the first hold display unit 5HL, the second hold display of the second hold display unit 5HR, etc. are updated in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols. To make the setting (S326). For example, when the special figure game using the first special figure is executed (started), the first hold display of the display portion corresponding to the hold number “1” is deleted (digested) in the first hold display unit 5HL. And the first reserved display in the display parts corresponding to the other holding numbers “2” to “4” is moved (shifted) in the direction of the display part that is erased one by one. On the other hand, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed (started), the second hold display of the display portion corresponding to the hold number “1” is deleted (digested) in the second hold display portion 5HR. And the second reserved display in the display parts corresponding to the other holding numbers “2” to “4” is moved (shifted) in the direction of the display part that is erased one by one. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S327), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S322A of FIG. 62 as the full-screen notice effect setting process. In the full-screen notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 63, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is a super reach change pattern or a non-reach change pattern based on the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. Determine (S501). If it is determined that the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern (S501; Yes), the presence / absence of a full-screen notice effect is determined (S502).

  Specifically, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number for determining the full screen notice, and uses the extracted numerical data and the full screen notice determination table shown in FIG. To determine whether to execute the full screen notice effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern, “no execution” is determined with a probability of 90% and “execution” is determined with a probability of 10%. Is determined with a probability of 60% for “no execution” and 40% for “execution”. In the case of a super reach variation pattern, “no execution” is 30% and “execution” is 70%. Determined by probability. In the case of a big hit, the full-screen notice effect is easier to be executed than in the case of a loss, so that the full-screen notice effect can be expected to be a big hit, and the fun of the game is improved. Note that the super reach variation pattern may include a variation pattern having pseudo-continuous variation as shown in FIG. For example, the determination ratio may be such that the higher the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the higher the degree of expectation. What is necessary is just to set so that a determination ratio may differ according to whether it is a big hit and the frequency | count of a pseudo | simulation variation.

  After execution of the process of S502, it is determined whether or not there is a full screen notice effect (S503). If it is determined that there is a full-screen notice effect (S503; Yes), the full-screen notice flag is set to the on state (S504). After executing the process of S504, the forward (downward) variation start timing of the decorative symbol is changed to the second timing (timing T03) after the end of the full screen notice effect (S505). For example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (B) and 70 (B), when there is a symbol reverse start display (reverse fluctuation) at the start of fluctuation, the start timing of the forward fluctuation is the timing T01 (first timing). Instead, the timing is changed to timing T03 (second timing) after the end of the full screen notice effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), when there is no symbol reverse start display (reverse fluctuation) at the start of fluctuation, the start timing of forward fluctuation is the timing T03 (second timing) after the end of the full screen notice effect. ).

  If it is determined in S501 that the pattern is neither a super-reach variation pattern nor a non-reach variation pattern (S501; No), if there is no full-screen notice effect in S503, or after the processing in S505, The screen preview effect setting process ends.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S322B of FIG. 62 as the symbol notice effect setting processing. In the symbol notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 64, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command from the main board 11. (S511). If it is determined that the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern (S511; Yes), the presence / absence of a symbol notice effect is determined (S512).

  Specifically, in the process of S512, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the symbol advancement, and uses the extracted numerical data and the symbol notification determining table shown in FIG. 64 (B). Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the symbol notice effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 64B, in the case of a non-reach variation pattern, “no execution” is determined with a probability of 90% and “execution” is determined with a probability of 10%. Is determined with a probability of 60% for “no execution” and 40% for “execution”. In the case of a super reach variation pattern, “no execution” is 30% and “execution” is 70%. Determined by probability. In the case of a big hit, the symbol notice effect is easier to be executed than in the case of losing, and it is possible to have a big hit expectation for the symbol notice effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Note that the super reach variation pattern may include a variation pattern having pseudo-continuous variation as shown in FIG. For example, the determination ratio may be such that the higher the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the higher the degree of expectation. What is necessary is just to set so that a determination ratio may differ according to whether it is a big hit and the frequency | count of a pseudo | simulation variation.

  After execution of the process of S512, it is determined whether or not the symbol notice effect has been determined (S513). When it is determined that the symbol notice effect is present (S513; Yes), the symbol notice flag is set to the on state (S514). After executing the process of S514, the type of symbol notice is determined (S515).

  Specifically, in the process of S515, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the symbol advancement effect type, and the extracted numerical data and the symbol advancement effect type determination table shown in FIG. 64 (C). Are used to determine the type of symbol notice effect, that is, the color of the aura of the decorative symbol (color of the aura image G). For example, as shown in FIG. 64C, in the case of the non-reach variation pattern, “blue” is determined, and in the case of the super reach (loss) variation pattern, “blue” is 50% and “green” is 40%. % And “red” are determined with a probability of 10%, and in the case of a super reach variation pattern, “blue” is determined with a probability of 10%, “green” is determined with a probability of 30%, and “red” is determined with a probability of 60%. The The expectation level of the jackpot is larger in the order of blue <green <red, and the expectation of the jackpot can be expected for the type of symbol notice effect (difference in the color of the aura). Can improve the fun of the game. Note that “red” in the case of the super reach (loss) fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 64C may be set to 0%. In this case, the “red” of the aura can be used as a premium symbol advance notice that the jackpot is confirmed.

  If it is determined in S511 that the pattern is neither a super reach variation pattern nor a non-reach variation pattern (S511; No), if there is no symbol announcement effect in S513, or after the processing of S515, The effect setting process ends.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S322C of FIG. 62 as the design reverse start display setting processing. In the symbol reverse start display setting process shown in FIG. 65, whether the effect control CPU 120 is a super reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command from the main board 11. Is determined (S521). If it is determined that the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern (S521; Yes), the presence / absence of a symbol reverse start display is determined (S522).

  Specifically, in the process of S522, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for design reverse start display determination, and at the same time extracts the numerical data and the design reverse start display determination shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute the symbol reverse start display is determined using the table. For example, as shown in FIG. 65B, in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern, “no execution” is determined with a probability of 90% and “execution” is determined with a probability of 10%. Is determined with a probability of 60% for “no execution” and 40% for “execution”. In the case of a super reach variation pattern, “no execution” is 30% and “execution” is 70%. Determined by probability. In the case of a big hit, the symbol reverse start display is easier to be executed than in the case of a loss, and the symbol reverse direction start display can be expected to have a big hit, improving the fun of the game.

  After execution of the process of S522, it is determined whether or not the symbol reverse start display is determined to be present (S523). If it is determined that there is a symbol reverse start display (S523; Yes), symbol reverse start display control setting is performed (S524). For example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (A) and 68 (B), a display for executing the reverse variation of the decorative symbol in the reverse variation period (that is, the period from the timing T01 at the start of the variation to the reverse variation end timing T03). Perform control settings. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no symbol reverse start display (S523; No), it is determined whether or not the full-screen notice flag is on (S525).

  If the full-screen notice flag is on (S525; Yes), it is set to symbol swing during the full-screen notice effect period (S526). As shown in FIG. 72 (B), during the full-screen notice effect period (period from the change start timing T01 to the full-screen notice pay timing T03), the display setting that the decorative symbol swings in the horizontal direction with the reference position Ref remains unchanged. Is done. The swing of the decorative pattern is hidden by the blackout effect (full screen notice) shown in FIGS. 73 (B2) and 73 (B3) and cannot be visually recognized by the player. When the period of the full screen notice effect is shorter than the period from the start of the change of the symbol to the start of the forward change, the swing of the decorative pattern can be visually recognized in the period of the timing T11 to T12 and the period of the timing T13 to T14. It becomes. On the other hand, if the full screen notice flag is not on (S525; No), as shown in FIG. 72 (A), the forward change start timing of the decorative symbol is set to the timing T01 (first timing) at the start of change. (S527).

  When it is determined in S521 that the pattern is neither a super reach variation pattern nor a non-reach variation pattern (S521; No), or after execution of the processing of S524, S526, and S527, the symbol reverse start display setting processing is terminated. .

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S322D of FIG. 62 as the symbol notice effect timing adjustment processing. In the symbol notice effect timing adjustment process shown in FIG. 66, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the symbol notice flag is on (S531). If the symbol notice flag is on (S531; Yes), it is determined whether or not the full screen notice flag is on (S532). If the full screen notice flag is on (S532; Yes), the symbol notice effect is set after the end of the full screen notice effect period (S533). On the other hand, if the full screen notice flag is off (S532; No), the symbol notice effect is set at the start of the fluctuation (S534). When the symbol notice flag is off in S531 (S531; No), or after executing the processing of S533 and S534, the symbol notice effect timing adjustment process is terminated.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S172 of FIG. 55 as variable display effect processing. In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 67, first, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, for example, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has passed (S341). As an example, in the process of S341, when the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted) and an end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, etc. It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in S341 (S341; No), it is determined whether or not it is the hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (S342). The hold display change effect period may be determined in advance in, for example, the effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined in the process of S323 shown in FIG. If it is the hold display change effect period (S342; Yes), control for executing the hold display change effect is performed (S343). In the process of S343, various commands created based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on, blinked, or turned off. Alternatively, it is only necessary that a predetermined display device can execute the hold display change effect by combining some or all of them.

  In addition, the display of the effect image showing the character (change effect character) in the hold display change common effect among the hold display change effects is started by executing the process of S603 shown in FIG. 56, and S607, Display control during variable display or symbol determination is performed by executing the process of S609, and the display is ended by executing the process of S605. Therefore, in the process of S343, display control related to the change effect character may not be performed. Alternatively, in the variable display in which the action effect in the hold display change effect is executed, the display of the change effect character is controlled in the process of S343, and in the variable display in which the action effect is not executed, the change effect character in the process of S343. The display control may not be performed.

  When it is determined in S342 that it is not the hold display change effect period (S342; No), after executing the process of S343, whether or not it is the full screen notice effect period for executing the full screen notice effect. Is determined (S344). When it is the full screen notice effect period (S344; Yes), control for executing the full screen notice effect is performed (S344A).

  When it is determined in S344 that it is not the full-screen notice effect period (S344; No), after executing the process of S344A, it is determined whether or not it is the symbol notice effect period for executing the symbol notice effect. (S344B). If it is the symbol notice effect period (S344B; Yes), control for executing the symbol notice effect is performed (S345).

  When it is determined in S344B that it is not the symbol notice effect period (S344B; No), it is a symbol reverse start display period for executing the symbol reverse start display after executing the process of S345. Is determined (S345A). When it is the symbol reverse start display period (S345A; Yes), control for executing the symbol reverse start display is performed (S345B). Further, immediately after S345, immediately after S345B, etc., other notice effects during variable display (step-up notice, serif notice, etc.) may be executed.

  When it is determined in S345A that it is not the symbol reverse start period (S345A; No), after executing the process of S345B, it is determined whether or not it is a reach effect period for executing the reach effect ( S346). The reach production period may be determined in advance, for example, in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined in S346 that it is the reach production period (S346; Yes), control for executing the reach production is performed (S347).

  When it is determined in S346 that it is not the reach effect period (S346; No), after executing the process of S347, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern Based on the above, control for executing effects during variable display including decorative display variable display operation is performed (S348).

  If the variable display time has elapsed in S341 (S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S349). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (S349; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and the apparatus waits. If the predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to successfully receive the symbol confirmation command. You may make it do.

  When the symbol confirmation command is received in S349 (S349; Yes), for example, the display result in the variable symbol display such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The final stop symbol (definite decorative symbol) is derived and displayed (S350). Further, in the process of S350, the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbols is derived and displayed, and the small symbol variation end control for ending the variation of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V is performed. In the small symbol variation end control, the small symbol corresponding to the confirmed decorative symbol determined in the process of S321 shown in FIG. 62 is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 5V as a display result in the variable symbol variable display. That's fine. As a result, in the small symbol display area 5V, the confirmed decorative symbol that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with each of the special symbol game using the first special symbol and the special symbol game using the second symbol. When the variable display is terminated after being derived, the variable display of the small symbols can also be ended. At this time, a predetermined time is set as the waiting start designation command reception waiting time (S351). In the process of S351A, the full-screen notice flag and the symbol notice flag are reset to the off state (S351A). Also, after the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (S352), the effect process during variable display is ended.

  For example, in the process of S348 shown in FIG. 67, the display control in the small symbol display area 5V is performed so that the small symbols are always variably displayed in a constant variation manner regardless of the variable display state of the decorative symbols. You can do it. For example, when the decorative symbol variable display state becomes a reach state or when a variable display effect such as “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C Even when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed partially or entirely in 5R, the small symbols are not temporarily stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 5V, and the variable display continuously fluctuates at a constant speed. Can be done.

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, after a game ball driven into the game area passes through (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, a start winning such as the first starting winning or the second starting winning occurs. Based on the establishment of the start condition that permits the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, the variable symbol special symbol display is started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The On the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols and small symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols.

  When the first start condition is established based on the occurrence of the first start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, the processing of S203 and S207 shown in FIG. 46 is executed. 1 is added to the number stored in the first special figure hold. When the second start condition is established based on the occurrence of the second start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening, the processing of S206 and S207 shown in FIG. 1 is added to the number of second special figure storage. At this time, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted by the processing of S209. In S212, the winning random number determination process as shown in FIG. 47 is executed to determine the variable display contents such as whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and the winning determination result is determined. A winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  Then, it is determined whether or not an effect control command transmitted at the time of starting winning including the winning determination result command has been received. If it is determined that a command has been received, the presence / absence or type of the pending display change effect is determined based on the specified winning determination result. If it is decided to execute the hold display change effect, whether or not there is a display change is determined. When it is determined that there is a display change, a hold display change pattern is determined, and when it is determined that there is no display change, a change effect timing pattern is determined. The determination results of the hold display change pattern and the change effect timing pattern are stored in association with the hold number in the hold display data storage unit.

  In S602 shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether there is a setting for executing a change effect such as a hold display change effect based on the stored contents in the hold display data storage unit. If it is determined that there is a setting, the display of the effect image indicating the character (change effect character) is started by the display start control in S603. The effect image indicating the change effect character can be continuously displayed over a plurality of variable displays until it is determined in S604 that the display end timing is reached. When each variable display is started, it is determined in S606 that a change start command has been received, so that the control start setting in S607 is performed, and the display mode of the effect image indicating the change effect character is the decorative pattern. The action mode corresponds to the variable display (during change). On the other hand, when the display result in each variable display is derived, it is determined in S608 that the symbol confirmation command has been received, so that the control start setting in S609 is performed, and the effect image showing the change effect character The display mode is a static mode corresponding to the fixed display of the decorative symbol. In this way, during the period in which the display result of the effect image indicating the decorative design that is the identification information image is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character can be set to the stationary mode.

  When variable display of a special game or decorative design is started based on the establishment of the start condition, a variation pattern setting process as shown in FIG. 51 is executed in S111 shown in FIG. A variation pattern designation command that determines any one of them and indicates the determined variation pattern is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In S321 shown in FIG. 62, a final stop symbol or the like is determined based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, and then, in the change effect setting processing in S322, it is determined that it is the hold display change timing. Is set to execute the hold display change effect. Subsequently, in the full-screen notice effect setting process of S322A, the presence / absence of the full-screen notice effect is determined, and when it is determined that the full-screen notice effect is present, execution setting of the full-screen notice effect is performed. Subsequently, in the symbol notification effect setting process of S322B, the presence / absence of the symbol notice effect is determined, and when the symbol notice effect is determined to be present, execution setting of the symbol notice effect is performed. Subsequently, in the symbol reverse start display setting process of S322C, the presence / absence of the symbol reverse start display is determined, and when the symbol reverse start display is determined to be present, execution setting of the symbol reverse start display is performed. Subsequently, in the symbol notice effect timing adjustment process of S322D, the adjustment setting of the symbol notice effect timing is performed. In S172 shown in FIG. 67, the decorative symbol is variably displayed (variable display) based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, and the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the ornament symbol is determined. The decoration symbol is completely stopped (derived display). In each effect period during the variable display, a full screen notice effect, a symbol notice effect, a symbol reverse start display, a reach effect, and the like can be executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, an example will be described in the case where a symbol change effect and a reverse variation are displayed in the presence or absence of the full screen notice effect. FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative design and each notice effect, and FIG. 68 (A) shows the case where the full screen notice effect is not executed, and FIG. 68 (B) shows the case where the full screen notice effect is executed. . FIG. 69 illustrates an effect execution example in the case shown in FIG. 68 in the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 69 (A), (B1) to (E1) are examples of performance execution in the case of FIG. 68 (A), and FIGS. 69 (A), (B2) to (E2) are FIG. It is an example of performance execution in the case of B).

  As shown in FIG. 68 (A), regarding the variation display of the decorative symbol, the reverse direction variation of all the decorative symbols is started at the start of the variation (timing T01) and the end of the reverse direction variation (timing T03). When the variation of the decorative pattern in the forward direction is started, the variation becomes high-speed variation, and thereafter, the variation of the decorative symbols on the left and right is decelerated to reach the reach display mode (reach establishment), and the reach effect is executed. As for each notice effect, in FIG. 68 (A), it is determined that the full screen notice effect is not executed, and at the timing T01, the decorative pattern reverse start display and the symbol notice effect are started. . The symbol notice effect ends at timing T02, and the reverse direction change ends at timing T03. At the end of this reverse direction change (timing T03), the decorative pattern starts to change in the forward direction. Looking at the execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), from the state in which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1). Reverse (upward) direction change opposite to the direction (downward) is started, and a symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 69 (B1), that is, a predetermined color (for example, blue, green) around the decorative symbol , Red, etc.), a notice effect in which an aura (afterglow) image G is displayed is also started. Then, at the end of the reverse direction fluctuation (timing T03) shown in FIG. 68 (A), the reverse change of the decorative pattern is stopped as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), and the decorative pattern is shown in FIG. 69 (D1). The variation of the symbol in the forward direction is started, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a variation in the forward direction beyond the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 69 (E1).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 68 (B), since the execution of the full screen notice effect is determined to be performed, the symbol notice effect is changed from the timing T01 as the initial value to the timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 69 (B2), and is included in the full screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 69 (C2). A notification image such as “Chance!” Is displayed, and after the end of the full screen notice effect in FIG. 69 (C2), that is, when the forward variation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 69 (D2). It has been changed to start the notice effect. That is, the start of the symbol notice effect is changed after the end of the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 69 (D2), not at the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 69 (B1). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the symbol notice effect from being hidden by the full screen notice effect. In addition, although the reverse direction start display of the decorative pattern is executed without change, it is hidden behind the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIGS. 69 (B2) and (C2). can not see. In addition, although the notification image shown in FIG. 69 (C2) is included in the full-screen notice effect, the notice image may be executed separately from the full-screen notice effect or the notification image may not be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 69 (D2), the design notice effect is started before the decorative symbol reaches the reference position Ref, but the decorative symbol is returned to the reference position Ref as indicated by a dashed line arrow. The symbol notice effect may be executed. Further, the execution period of the symbol notice effect is shorter than the backward fluctuation execution period as shown in FIG. 68A, but may be the same as or longer than the backward fluctuation execution period. The same applies to the case where the start is changed to the timing T03 as shown in FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, an example will be described in which the symbol change effect is not executed and the reverse variation is displayed in the case of the presence or absence of the full screen notice effect. FIG. 70 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative symbol and each notice effect, etc. In FIG. 70, when the symbol notice effect and the full screen notice effect are not executed in FIG. Shows a case where there is no execution of the symbol notice effect and reverse variation is executed with the full screen notice effect. FIG. 71 shows an effect execution example in the case shown in FIG. 70 in the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 71 (A), (B1), (C1), (D), and (E) are examples of performance execution in the case of FIG. 70 (A), FIGS. 71 (A), (B2), ( C2), (D), and (E) are examples of performance execution in the case of FIG.

  The decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 70A is the same as that in FIG. 68A described above, and a description thereof is omitted here. Further, regarding each notice effect, in FIG. 70A, it is determined that the full screen notice effect and the symbol notice effect are not executed, and at the timing T01, the reverse start display of the decorative symbol is started. The direction change ends at timing T03. At the end of this reverse direction change (timing T03), the decorative pattern starts to change in the forward direction. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), from the state in which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, as shown in FIG. 71 (B1). As shown in FIG. 71 (C1), reverse direction (upward) fluctuation opposite to the direction (downward direction) is started, and at the end of reverse direction fluctuation (timing T03) shown in FIG. 70 (A). The reverse variation of the symbol is stopped, and the variation of the decorative symbol in the forward direction is started as shown in FIG. 71 (D1), and the decorative symbol is displayed in the forward direction over the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 71 (E1). It will be done.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 70B, it is determined that the symbol notice effect is not executed, and the full screen notice effect and the reverse direction change are determined to be executed. Starts at the start of fluctuation (timing T01) and ends at timing T03. At the end of this reverse direction change (timing T03), the decorative pattern starts to change in the forward direction. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 71 (B2), and is included in the full screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 71 (C2). A notification image such as “Chance!” Is displayed, and after the full screen notice effect of FIG. 71 (C2) is completed, that is, as shown in FIG. In addition, although the reverse start display of the decorative pattern is executed, it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIGS. I can't see the change. In addition, the notification image shown in FIG. 71 (C2) is included in the full-screen notice effect, but it may be a notice that is executed separately from the full-screen notice effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the fluctuating display in the forward direction can be visually recognized before the decorative symbol reaches the reference position Ref. However, as indicated by a one-dot chain line arrow, the decorative symbol is displayed at the reference position Ref. The change display in the forward direction from the returned state may be visible.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 72 and FIG. 73, an example will be described in which the symbol change effect is executed in the case where the reverse direction change is not executed and there is a full screen notice effect. FIG. 72 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative pattern and each notice effect, etc. In (A), there is no execution of the full screen notice effect and reverse direction change, and in (B), there is no execution of reverse direction change. The case where there is execution of the full screen notice effect and the symbol notice effect is shown. FIG. 73 illustrates an effect execution example in the case shown in FIG. 72 in the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 73 (A) and 73 (B1) are examples of performance execution in the case of FIG. 72 (A), and FIGS. 73 (A), (B2), (C2), and (D2) are FIG. It is an example of performance execution in the case of B).

  The decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 72 (A) is the same as that shown in FIG. 68 (A), and the description thereof is omitted here. Also, regarding each notice effect, in FIG. 72A, it is determined that the full screen notice effect and the reverse variation of the decorative symbol are not executed, and the symbol notice effect at the start of the change (timing T01). Is started. The symbol notice effect ends at the subsequent timing T02. Note that the forward variation of the decorative pattern is also started at the start of the variation (timing T01). As shown in FIG. 73 (A), the execution example at this time is as shown in FIG. 73 (B1) from the state in which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display as shown in FIG. 73 (A). The change to the direction (downward) is started, and the symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 73 (B1), that is, the aura of the predetermined color (for example, blue, green, red, etc.) around the decorative symbol (rear) The notice effect that the image G of light is displayed is also started.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 72B, since it is determined that the symbol notice effect and the full screen notice effect are to be executed, the symbol notice effect is changed from the timing T01 as the initial value to the timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 73 (B2), and is included in the full screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 73 (C2). A notification image such as “Chance!” Is displayed, and after the end of the full screen notice effect in FIG. 73 (C2), that is, when the forward variation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 73 (D2). It has been changed to start the notice effect. That is, the start of the symbol notice effect is changed after the end of the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 73 (D2), not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 73 (B1). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the symbol notice effect from being hidden by the full screen notice effect. As shown in FIG. 72 (B), it is determined that the symbol notice effect and the full screen notice effect are to be executed, and it is determined that the decorative symbol is not changed in the reverse direction. During the execution period of the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in C2), the decorative symbols are swung as shown in FIG. 72B, but are hidden behind the full screen notice effect. Therefore, the player cannot see the swing of the decorative symbols. The start of the change in the forward direction of the decorative pattern is changed after the end of the execution period of the full screen notice effect. Moreover, although the notification image shown in FIG. 73 (C2) is included in the full-screen notice effect, the notice image may be executed separately from the full-screen notice effect, or the notification image may not be displayed.

  Here, an example of a case where the adjustment result image R is displayed during a predetermined effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 shows an effect execution example in the case of including the display of the operation promotion image P and a predetermined cut-in effect in the super reach variation pattern.

  When the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative design is executed and the variable display state of the decorative design becomes the reach state as shown in FIG. 74A, a predetermined reach effect in the normal reach is executed, and thereafter, FIG. The development notification image to the super reach is performed by displaying on the image display device 5 the development notification image (in the illustrated example, “super reach!”) As shown in FIG. When the player performs an adjustment operation during the change, the adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right corner of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 74B (corresponding to S710 in FIG. 58).

  Following such development notification, the operation promotion image P is displayed during the execution of the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. 74C (start of the operation promotion display). Then, when the operation using the push button 31B is performed, a predetermined cut-in effect is executed as shown in FIG. 74 (D). Note that, when the operation with the push button 31B is not performed during the display period of the operation promotion image P, the cut-in effect is not executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74E, for example, the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  Until the predetermined period T1 elapses after the adjustment operation is performed, the adjustment result image R remains displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. In this case, the adjustment result image R is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the development notification image or the operation promotion image P (an example of the specific effect image). However, in the variable display result derivation period T2, the adjustment result image R is deleted as shown in FIG. 74E (corresponding to S712) even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed.

  In the change effect character display process shown in FIG. 56, when it is determined in S601 that the character is not being displayed, it is determined in S602 whether there is a setting for executing the change effect. At this time, when it is determined that there is a setting for executing the change effect based on the stored content of the hold display data storage unit, the process of S603 is executed. Thereby, for example, the effect image of the character CH1 shown in FIG. 57 (B) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

  After that, for example, an on-hold display change common effect including an effect on the effect image of the character CH1 shown in FIG. 57B acting on a predetermined on-hold display (for example, on-hold display with the hold number “3”) is executed. . Subsequently, a hold display change effect according to the presence / absence of the display change and the determination result of the hold display change pattern is executed. For example, when “display change is present” is determined in the display change presence / absence determination process (not shown) and the first hold display change pattern is determined in the hold display change pattern determination process (not shown), As a display mode of the hold display, a hold display change success effect in which the display color changes to blue among the specific colors is executed. On the other hand, when “no display change” is determined in the display change presence / absence determination process (not shown), a hold display change failure effect (hold change change effect) in which the display mode of the hold display does not change is executed. The

  Even when a finalized decorative symbol, which is a display result in variable display of decorative symbols, is derived, the effect image indicating the character CH1 continues until the display end timing is determined in the process of S604 shown in FIG. Is displayed. At this time, if it is determined in step S608 that a symbol confirmation command has been received, step S609 is executed. Thereby, in the period when the definitive decorative symbol is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes the static mode. Subsequently, when variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is started based on the fact that the stored memory number is other than “0”, it is determined that a change start command has been received in the process of S606 shown in FIG. As a result, the process of S607 is executed. Thereby, the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 becomes the action mode triggered by the reception of the change start command that becomes the display control information that can specify that the variable display is started.

  In the period in which the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is derived, the effect indicating the character CH1 as the change effect character The display mode of the image is a static mode. With the setting of the display layer as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the effect image showing the character CH1 can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side as seen from the player than the effect image showing the decoration design. It is displayed with priority over the effect image shown. By making the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing such a decorative design as a stationary mode, the player can display the decorative design in a variable display. It is possible to clearly recognize that the result has been derived, and to prevent misrecognition of the display result.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the full-screen notice effect (predetermined notice effect) is executed, FIG. 68 (B), FIG. 70 (B), FIG. ), After the execution period of the full screen notice effect has elapsed (for example, at timing T03), variable display is started in the forward direction (predetermined direction) of the decorative symbol (identification information). Can be prevented from becoming difficult to understand. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved.

  That is, in a gaming machine that executes a predetermined notice effect (for example, “blackout effect” disclosed in JP-A-2006-122265, etc.) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the identification information (decorative symbol), the identification information However, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent the movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand and to improve the interest of the game.

  The predetermined direction in which the decorative design (identification information) is variably displayed is a normal direction (a forward direction such as a downward direction). For example, the normal direction (forward direction) includes a basic change direction for variable display (fluctuation display) of decorative symbols, a direction in which identification information is mainly displaced in variable display, a change direction when there is no notice effect, a game The direction of change that the person most looks at (exclusively), the direction of change when the derived display is performed, and the like are included. That is, it is possible to prevent the movement of the decorative symbol (identification information) in the normal direction (forward direction) from becoming difficult to understand in variable display.

  In addition, the full-screen notice effect (predetermined notice effect) is an effect suggesting an expectation level that is in an advantageous state, so that the expectation of the game can be increased by the notice effect. Further, after the elapse of the execution period of the full-screen notice effect (predetermined notice effect) (for example, timing T03 shown in FIGS. 68B, 70B, and 72B), the decorative symbol (identification information) is displayed. ) Starts in a predetermined direction (variable display), so that it is possible to prevent the movement of the decorative design (identification information) from becoming difficult to understand.

  Further, the image display device 5 (variable display means) displays the decorative pattern (identification information) in a specific direction (for example, the reverse direction shown in FIGS. 69 (B1) and 71 (B1)) different from a predetermined direction (for example, the forward direction). Etc.), the direction of the variable display becomes diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 68B and 70B, the image display device 5 (variable display means) is a decorative pattern (identification information) at least during the execution period of the full screen notice effect (predetermined notice effect). Since the identification information is variably displayed in the specific direction, the identification information can be variably displayed in the reverse direction (specific direction) and then variably displayed in the forward direction (predetermined direction) different from the reverse direction. Can be used as a preparation effect (or a preparation pattern) for variable display in the forward direction (predetermined direction). In particular, when the specific direction is the reverse direction of the predetermined direction as in the present embodiment, the variable direction can be variably displayed in the reverse direction (specific direction) and then variably displayed in the predetermined direction. Can provide variable display. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved.

  In addition, at the start of variable display in a predetermined direction (forward direction), as shown in FIG. 69 (B1) and FIG. 73 (B1), a symbol notice effect (identification information notice) is executed to improve the interest of the game. it can. In addition, since a plurality of symbol notice effects are provided (for example, blue, green, and red aura display shown in FIG. 64C), a plurality of symbol notice effects can be executed, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

  Further, when the symbol notice effect (identification information notice) and the full screen notice effect (predetermined notice effect) are executed, after the end of the full screen notice effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (B) and 72 (B)). At timing T03), the symbol preview effect is executed as shown in FIG. 69 (D2) and FIG. 73 (D2), so that the symbol preview effect and the full screen preview performance are prevented from being executed at the same time. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol notice effect from becoming unrecognizable or difficult to see due to the full screen notice effect. In other words, the recognizability of the symbol notice effect can be improved, for example, the player can clearly recognize the symbol notice effect.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above includes adjustment means realized by the effect control CPU 120 in cooperation with each unit, and adjustment image display means. The adjustment means can adjust the effect in accordance with the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) by the player at least during execution of the variable display. The adjustment image display means can adjust the adjustment result image R () corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means. An example of the adjustment image is displayed for a predetermined period T1. Then, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means makes the adjustment result image R not visible during the variable display result derived display period T2 during the predetermined period T1. Since it did in this way, the fall of the recognition property of the variable display result derived | led-out displayed can be suppressed.

  In addition, although the example which can adjust a sound volume was demonstrated above, the display effect etc. of the image display apparatus 5 etc. may be sufficient as the presentation effect which can be adjusted as mentioned above. Further, the adjustable effect may be at least one of volume and brightness (that is, both volume and brightness may be adjustable). The adjustment image may be displayed not only when the volume is changed by the adjustment operation, but also when the volume is not changed. Further, the adjustment image display means not only makes the adjustment image invisible in the derivation display period T2, but also displays the adjustment image in a translucent manner or blinking in the derivation display period T2. It may be difficult to view. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. In this case, for example, a process of displaying the adjustment result image in a difficult-to-view mode is executed instead of S712 in FIG. 58, and the display is returned from the display in the difficult-to-view mode in S715 (adjustment is performed within the predetermined period T1). The effect effect setting process may be modified and configured such that the image is restored.

  Further, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means cannot visually recognize or difficult to view the adjustment result image R in the variable display result derived display period T2 during the predetermined period T1. The adjustment image may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the specific effect image such as the promotion display image P. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. In addition, since the adjustment image can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the specific effect image, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of information displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the specific effect image displayed at a position that does not overlap with the adjustment image is not only the promotion display image P, the development notification image (see FIG. 74B), but also the image indicating the character CH1 or the above-described fourth design. Or an image showing a hold display.

  Further, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means cannot visually recognize or difficult to view the adjustment result image R in the variable display result derived display period T2 during the predetermined period T1. The adjusting means may not adjust the effect related to the error notification. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. In addition, the error sound and the display brightness of the error image can be kept at the specified value, so that it is possible to prevent the player or the game store clerk from noticing the occurrence of the error despite the occurrence of some error. . The effects related to error notification that the adjusting means do not adjust include not only the error volume but also the brightness (light quantity) when an error image is displayed, the brightness of a lamp (such as the game effect lamp 9) that is lit when an error occurs, and the like. It may be.

  Further, at least a part of the display area of the adjusted image may overlap with at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 59 (A1)). In this way, since the adjusted image result image that overlaps at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result is deleted, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the visibility of the variable display result. The derived display area of the variable display result in which at least a part of the display area of the adjustment image overlaps is not limited to the decorative symbol display area Ar (see FIG. 59 (A1)), and the variable display of the effect image showing the small symbol is possible. It may be a small symbol display area 5V where the display result is derived.

  Further, the error image may not be deleted during the derivation display of the variable display result (for example, refer to FIG. 59 (D2)). In this way, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

  Further, the display of the error image is prioritized over the display of the adjusted image (for example, until the effect control CPU 120 that has received the abnormality notification command in step S57 eliminates the error indicated by the command shown in FIG. 59 (D1)). , (D2) may continue to be displayed). Even in this case, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

  When the adjustment operation is performed, the demonstration display is kept visible (for example, see FIG. 59B), but when the menu display operation is performed, the demonstration display is deleted (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control is used). , S659, S660, and S662). By doing so, a demonstration display can be suitably performed.

  In addition, a specific effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the change effect character display process in S162) capable of displaying the specific effect image during the variable display of the identification information is provided, and the specific effect image is at least The identification information can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of a part of the identification information (see, for example, FIG. 57B), and the specific effect executing means can identify the identification information during a period in which the variable display result of the identification information is derived. Alternatively, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set to a static mode at a position overlapping the front side (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of S609). In this way, misrecognition of the display result can be prevented.

  In addition, the gaming machine is smaller than the first area where the identification information image is displayed (for example, the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.). In the region (for example, the small symbol display area 5V), the display information is variably displayed in synchronism with the variable display of the identification information image and the display result is derived (for example, the effect of executing the processes of S325 and S350) A control CPU 120 or the like). In such a configuration, misrecognition of the display result can be prevented.

  Also, information output means (for example, the process of S266) that outputs display control information (for example, a first change start command, a second change start command, etc.) that can specify that variable display is started according to the determination result of the decision means. And the effect executing means may set the display mode of the specific effect image to a non-stationary mode (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the processing of S607). Part). By doing so, it is possible to prevent misrecognition of the display result while suppressing the uncomfortable feeling of the specific performance.

  In addition, the specific effect image can be disposed at an overlapping position at least in front of a part of the identification information image (see, for example, FIG. 57B), and the specific effect execution means includes the identification information. In a period in which an image display result is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a temporary stop mode at a position overlapping the front side of the identification information image. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production while preventing misperception of the display result.

  Further, the period during which the adjustment image is not visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize is not limited to the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result. The adjustment image may be invisible or difficult to view during a reach action (for example, during full rotation). In other words, the period during which the adjustment image is not visually recognized may be a predetermined period during which the target to be recognized by the player is notified. Further, the adjustment image may be displayed at a position where it is superimposed on a specific effect image such as the promotion display image P. Further, the effect related to error notification may be adjustable by the adjusting means. In addition, the display area of the adjustment image may not overlap with the derived display area of the variable display result.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not have all the technical features described above, and may have a part of the above-described configuration so as to solve at least one problem in the conventional technology. Good. Hereinafter, modified examples will be described.

(Modification 1)
In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 68 (B) and 70 (B), the execution period of the full screen notice effect and the execution period of the reverse direction change completely coincide, that is, the full screen notice. Although the effect and the backward direction change start at the same timing and end at the same time, as shown in FIG. 75, the execution period of the full screen notice effect may be shorter than the reverse direction change period. In FIG. 75, the reverse direction fluctuation starts at the timing when the fluctuation starts (that is, timing T11) and ends at timing T14. In contrast, the full screen notice effect starts at timing T12 later than timing T11 and ends at timing T13 before timing T14. According to the first modification, it is possible to visually recognize the variation (variable display) in the reverse direction (upward direction) of the decorative symbols in the period from the timing T11 to T12 and the period from the timing T13 to T14. The change in the reverse direction (upward direction) of the decorative symbol may be visible only in either one of the period of timing T11 to T12 or the period of timing T13 to T14.

(Modification 2)
In the embodiment described above, the variation in the reverse direction of the decorative symbol is assumed to vary in the reverse direction by about one decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 69 (C1). In this way, the type of symbol reverse start display can be selected. Specifically, in the second modification, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), there is a process (S523A) for determining the type of symbol reverse starting, and a plurality of types (for example, as shown in FIG. 76 (B)). 3 types of “small”, “medium”, and “large”). In the “small” type, the decorative symbol is changed back by one, in the “medium” type, the decorative symbol is changed back by two, and in the “large” type, the decorative symbol is changed back by three. By the process of S523A, one type of reverse direction fluctuation is selected from these three types. Specifically, in the process of S523A, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for design reverse start display type determination, and the extracted numerical data and the reverse design start display shown in FIG. 76 (B). Using the type determination table, the type of the symbol reverse start display, that is, the mode of the reverse direction variation of the decorative symbol is determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 76B, in the case of the non-reach variation pattern, “small” is determined, and in the case of the super reach (loss) variation pattern, “small” is 50% and “medium” is 40. % And “Large” are determined with a probability of 10%. In the case of a super-reach (big hit) variation pattern, “Small” is determined with a probability of 10%, “Medium” is determined with 30%, and “Large” is determined with a probability of 60%. The The jackpot expectation level is that the amount of return of the decorative symbol increases in the order of small <medium <large, and you can have a big hit expectation about the type of reverse variation of the decorative symbol (difference in the amount of reverse of the symbol) It is possible to have fun with the design reverse start display, and the fun of the game is improved.

  Further, a plurality of types of full screen notice effects may be provided, and the type of full screen notice may be selectable. For example, the types of full-screen notice effects include those with different execution periods of full-screen notice effects, those with different transparency, those with different notification contents shown in FIG. 69 (C2), and output sounds that are output when these are displayed. There are different (sound effect, music, etc.), a combination of two or more of these, and the big hit expectation may be different. The longer the execution period, the lower the transparency, the higher the notification effect shown in FIG. 69 (C2), the higher the effect, and the higher the output sound or the specific output sound, Good.

(Modification 3)
In the embodiment described above, the decorative pattern can be changed in the reverse direction (reverse starting shown in FIGS. 69 (B1) and (C1)) as shown in FIG. 68, but the reverse as shown in FIGS. 77 and 78. It may be possible to swing instead of changing the direction (Modification 3). In the third modification, the reverse direction in S322C shown in FIGS. 62 and 65 may be replaced with rocking, and the reverse direction in S345A and S345B shown in FIG. 67 may be replaced with rocking. In FIG. 77 (A), it is determined that the full-screen notice effect is not executed, and at the timing T01, the decorative symbol swing display and the symbol notice effect are started. The symbol notice effect ends at timing T02, and the swing display ends at timing T03. At the end of the swing display (timing T03), the decorative pattern starts to change in the forward direction. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), as shown in FIG. 78 (B1), from the state in which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display. When the dynamic display is started, a symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 78 (B1), that is, an aura (backlight) image G of a predetermined color (for example, blue, green, red, etc.) is displayed around the decorative symbol. The displayed notice effect is also started. Then, at the end of the swing display shown in FIG. 77 (A) or 78 (C1) (timing T03), as shown in FIG. 78 (D1), the decorative symbol at the reference position Ref changes in the forward direction. Is started.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 77 (B), since the execution of the full screen notice effect is determined to be performed, the symbol notice effect is changed from the timing T01 as the initial value to the timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 78 (B2), and is included in the full screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 78 (C2). A notification image such as “Chance!” Is displayed, and after the end of the full-screen notice effect in FIG. 78 (C2), that is, when the forward variation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 78 (D2). It has been changed to start the notice effect. That is, the start of the symbol notice effect is changed after the end of the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 78 (D2), not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 78 (B1). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the symbol notice effect from being hidden by the full screen notice effect. Note that the decorative symbol swing display is executed without change, but it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIGS. 78 (B2) and (C2), so that it is visible to the player. Absent.

  In the above-described embodiment, the full screen notice effect, the symbol notice effect, and the symbol reverse start display are selected by lottery as shown in FIGS. 62 to 65. However, as shown in the variation pattern shown in FIG. You may make it provide the fluctuation pattern (For example, it calls a special fluctuation pattern) provided with at least one among an effect, a symbol notice effect, and a symbol reverse start display.

  In the above description, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided on the screen of the image display device 5 to perform variable display of decorative symbols. It has been described that the symbol display area 5V is provided and small symbols are variably displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the small symbol display area 5V is not provided, by displaying an effect image indicating a decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is displayed. The variable display may be executable. Even in this case, it is possible to place an effect image indicating a character or the like as a specific effect image at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating an ornamental pattern as an identification information image, and the display result in variable display of the ornamental pattern is In the derived period, the display mode of the specific effect image displayed at the position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing the decorative design may be set as the static mode. Thereby, the misrecognition of the display result in the variable display of a decorative design can be prevented.

  Also, instead of variably displaying the effect image showing the decorative pattern, or by displaying the prepared effect image in an animation together with such variable display, it supports variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. When the display result in the variable display of the special symbol is derived, the animation display of the effect image is interrupted or paused, and the display that can recognize the display result of the variable display is performed. The display result may be derived separately. In this way, it is possible to execute a related display for deriving a display result in relation to a determination result of whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and an overlapping position ahead of the effect image in this related display In the case where the specific effect image can be arranged, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a static mode during the period in which the display result in the related display is derived.

  Further, in the above, when the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display change” is executed, the effect image indicating the character used in the hold display change effect can be displayed as the specific effect image over a plurality of variable displays. Explained as a thing. On the other hand, for example, a pre-reading notice effect of “pending display change” and a different look-ahead notice effect different from this can be executed simultaneously over a plurality of variable displays, and characters used in part or all of the pre-reading notice effect are shown. The effect image may be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative design. In this case, among the effect images used in the pre-reading notice effect, the effect image arranged at the overlapping position in front of the identification information image is used as the specific effect image, and a display result is derived whether the variable display is being performed. The display mode may be changed to the action mode or the static mode depending on whether the display mode is a period.

  Moreover, in the above, it demonstrated as an example of a specific effect image displaying the effect image which shows the character used by a hold display change effect. On the other hand, as a specific effect image, display is started during variable display when variable display of decorative symbols is performed or before the start of variable display, and is continuously displayed even during a period in which the display result in variable display is derived. Any effect image may be used. For example, an effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays corresponding to a period in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state (high probability high base state or high probability low base state) It may be displayed so that it can also be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating. Alternatively, an effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays corresponding to a period in which the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode is more than an effect image showing a decorative pattern. May also be displayed so as to be arranged at overlapping positions on the front side. In this way, as the specific effect image, an effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays is displayed so that it can be placed at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative design. During the period in which the display result is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a static mode.

  The effect image indicating the character may be an effect image indicating, for example, a person or animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. During variable display in which variable display of decorative symbols or the like is executed, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set as the action mode by reproducing and displaying the moving image as the specific effect image. In this case, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set to the static mode by temporarily stopping the reproduction of the moving image.

  When the effect image indicating one decorative design is an identification information image, the effect image that is the specific effect image is arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating a part of the one decorative image. It may be a thing, and may be arrange | positioned in the position which overlaps ahead rather than the production image which shows the whole of one decoration design. When an effect image showing a plurality of decorative symbols is an identification information image, the effect image that is the specific effect image is a position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing some of the decorative symbols among the plurality of decorative symbols It may be arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing all the decorative symbols.

  The type and part of the identification information image on which the effect image that is the specific effect image can be arranged on the front side may be different depending on at least one of the gaming state and the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state (low probability low base state), the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol is used regardless of whether the decorative symbol is a normal symbol or a probabilistic symbol. An effect image that becomes a specific effect image can be arranged at the overlapping position. On the other hand, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probabilistic state (high probability high base state or high probability low base state), it overlaps more forward than the effect image showing the normal symbol among the plurality of decorative symbols. While it is possible to place an effect image that becomes a specific effect image at a position, an effect image that becomes a specific effect image is not arranged at an overlapping position in front of an effect image that shows a probability variation pattern among a plurality of decorative symbols. May be. In this case, when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the player's attention that the probability variation state is derived as a jackpot combination and the probability variation state continues is prevented from being hindered by the display of the specific effect image. This can improve the fun of gaming.

  Further, for example, when the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal effect mode, an effect image that becomes a specific effect image is provided at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol, regardless of the symbol number of the decorative symbol. It can be placed. On the other hand, when the production state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special production mode different from the normal production mode over a plurality of variable displays, for example, a decorative design with a specific design number associated with a specific person is shown. The effect image that becomes the specific effect image may not be arranged at the overlapping position in front of the effect image. Thus, the specific effect image may be any image that can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of at least a part of the identification information image.

  In the above description, it has been described that the display mode is set to the static mode for all of the effect images to be the specific effect image during the period in which the display result of the variable display such as the decorative pattern to be the identification information image is derived. On the other hand, at least a part of the specific effect image arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image of the decorative design may be anything that can change the display mode to the static mode.

  Moreover, in the above, in the period in which the display result in the variable display of the decorative design or the like is derived, the display mode of the decorative design that becomes the specific effect image arranged at the overlapping position in front of the effect image showing the decorative design Has been described as being in a stationary mode. On the other hand, when there is an effect image (backward arrangement image) arranged behind the effect image showing the decorative design, variable display of the decorative design is executed during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived. The rear arrangement image may be displayed in the same display manner as during variable display. For example, a background image display layer is provided as a display layer that is assigned a value larger than the Z value of the effect image drawn on the decorative design display layer shown in FIG. Also good. An effect image that is a background image is drawn on the background image layer. The Z value may be set so that the background image display layer is arranged on the rearmost side as viewed from the player. In this case, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display mode of the effect image that becomes the background image arranged in the overlapping position or the non-overlapping position behind the effect image indicating the decorative design is variably displayed. It is good also as a display mode similar to the inside. As a result, an effect image that may cause misrecognition in the display result, such as a specific effect image, is set to a static mode, while an effect image that does not cause misrecognition of the display result, such as a background image, is displayed in the same manner as during variable display. By setting it as an aspect, the uncomfortable feeling with respect to the display of an effect image can be reduced.

  In the above, during variable display in which decorative display of variable designs is performed, the display mode of the effect image that is the specific effect image is set as the action mode, while the display result in the variable display is derived in the period of time. It has been described that the display mode of the effect image that is the specific effect image arranged on the front side of the effect image that shows the decorative pattern that is the identification information image is the still image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display of the effect image that is the specific effect image arranged at the overlapping position in front of the effect image showing the decorative design The mode may be an idling mode different from the static mode. The idling mode may be a temporary stop mode that is set so that the display mode of the specific effect image is different from that of the action mode within a range in which display results are not misidentified.

  In addition, during variable display in which decorative display variable display or the like is performed, for example, an effect image that informs a message “in design change” as a character line may be displayed as the specific effect image. On the other hand, during the period in which the display result of the decorative symbol variable display or the like is derived, for example, an effect image informing a message of “design confirmed” as a character line may be displayed as the specific effect image. In this way, depending on whether the variable display is being performed or the display result is derived, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific effect image by changing the content of the message that is notified as the character dialogue. Also good.

  When an effect image (character image) showing a character composed of a plurality of parts is displayed as the specific effect image, variable display of decorative symbols is executed during the period in which the display result of variable display is derived. The specific effect image may be displayed in a different display mode.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment (the same applies to the first embodiment) may be one that does not perform variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As an example, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) a start winning opening provided in the game area, the variable winning device provided in the game area is changed from the closed state (second state) to the open state ( When the game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters the specific area (V winning opening) of the plurality of areas, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It may be configured as described above. In such a configuration, based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the start winning opening, the determination result as to whether or not to change the variable winning device to the first state and the first state are changed. In relation to at least one of a determination result that the change mode of the time is one of a plurality of modes, or a determination result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state according to the passing situation of the game ball inside the variable winning device When the related effect for deriving the display result can be executed and the specific effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position in front of the effect image in the related display, the display result in the related display is derived in the period The display mode of the specific effect image may be a static mode.

  In the above description, the advantageous state advantageous to the player is described as being controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special game state such as a probability change state may be an advantageous state, and the upper limit number of rounds that can be executed among a plurality of big hit game states is the second round number (for example, “7 A big hit gaming state having a first round number (for example, “15”) larger than “)” may be an advantageous state. Alternatively, the time-short state in which the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed among the plurality of time-short states is a first number (for example, “100”) greater than the second number (for example, “50”) may be an advantageous state. The probability variation state in which the big hit probability is a first probability (for example, 1/20) higher than the second probability (for example, 1/20) among the plurality of probability variation states may be set as the advantageous state. Any other game state that is advantageous to the player may be used.

  When the hold display change effect is executed, a limit effect that restricts the hold display may be executed. For example, the limited effect is to display an effect image for display limitation in the display area of the image display device 5, and to perform translucent display, transparent display, or reduced display on the first hold display unit 5HL or the second hold display unit 5HR. In other words, the player cannot see or see part or all of the on-hold display by moving the production model (movable member) from the retracted state to the advanced state and hiding the on-hold display in the advanced state. What is necessary is just to restrict | limit so that it may become difficult.

  In the above description, the probability variation control condition is established based on the fact that the jackpot type determined in the process of S242 shown in FIG. 50 includes “probability variation” and the determination result of the jackpot type is “probability variation”. In the above description, it is assumed that the jackpot game state is controlled to the probability change state after the end. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball that has won (entered) a big winning opening (second large winning opening) in the probability changing attacker provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area has been detected by the probability changing detection switch. Based on the above, the probability variation control condition may be established, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state may be controlled to the certain probability variation state. The probability winning attacker's big prize opening (second big prize opening) can change from a closed state to an open state when the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state is a predetermined number of times (for example, “16”). When the number of times of execution of the game is other than the predetermined number, it may not be possible to change to the open state in the closed state. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area in the attacker that is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the game area. You may be comprised so that it may become.

  The special symbols and decorative symbols are not limited to those variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured using a plurality of LEDs, and only a specific (single) LED among the plurality of LEDs is displayed during variable display of the special symbol. Is repeatedly turned on and off, and the other LEDs are kept off. And when the variable display result is “losing”, the LED that has been repeatedly turned on and off emits light (lights) in a predetermined emission color, or maintains the light off state, Stop displaying special symbols. At this time, the other LEDs remain off. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed by a predetermined lighting pattern in which some or all of the LEDs are turned on. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, a specific (single) symbol is switched between display and non-display, while other symbols are maintained in a non-display state. Good. Then, any of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (stop display) as a final stop symbol (determined special symbol or definite ornament symbol) resulting in a variable display result of the special symbol or ornament symbol. Further, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured by using a 7-segment LED, and during the variable display of the special symbol, a symbol indicating “−” (lighting) is displayed. It may be configured such that other numbers and symbols are not displayed by repeating the non-display (off). As a special symbol variable display result, a symbol indicating “−” is not stopped and displayed as a predetermined lighting pattern including numbers indicating “1” to “9” and other symbols. The special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, as a variable display result, symbols that are not stopped are switched between display and non-display, while other symbols are maintained in a non-display state. May be.

(Third embodiment)
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. The third embodiment is a combination of the first embodiment and the second embodiment. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment is a gaming machine that combines the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment and the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment.

Example 1
The pachinko gaming machine 1 produces the effects of the first embodiment (the first operation effect described with reference to FIG. 37, the first operation effect described with reference to FIG. 38, etc., during one change, FIGS. 37 to 42). Etc.) and the effect of the second embodiment (full screen notice effect and symbol notice effect explained using FIG. 68 to FIG. 74, FIG. 75 to 78, etc.) Any one of the full-screen notice effect, the symbol notice effect, etc. described as each modification example can be executed.

  For example, depending on the conditions (current gaming state, variation pattern, first special figure / second special figure, one or more of the number of holdings, etc.), the effect of the first embodiment is executed, It may be determined whether to execute the effect of the second embodiment or not both. The determination ratio may be varied depending on the conditions.

  The player's preference may be reflected. For example, when it is determined that one of the effects of the first embodiment or the effect of the second embodiment is executed by lottery, the player may select which effect to execute after the determination. Good. In addition, one of the effects of the first embodiment / the effects of the second embodiment is preliminarily selected by the player, and either the effects of the first embodiment or the effects of the second embodiment are selected by lottery. When it is decided to execute either one of them, the player may select the direction selected by the player. Note that either one may be selected as the premier effect. In other words, if it is determined that one of the effects of the first embodiment or the effect of the second embodiment is to be executed by lottery and the game is lost, the effect that the player has not selected is always selected. On the other hand, if it is determined that either one of the effects of the first embodiment or the effects of the second embodiment is to be executed by lottery and the game is a big hit, the player who has not selected Either the production or the production selected by the player may be executed.

(Example 2)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 produces the effects of the first embodiment (the first operation effect described with reference to FIG. 37, the first operation effect described with reference to FIG. 38, etc., during one change, FIGS. 37 to 42). Etc.) and the effect of the second embodiment (full screen notice effect and symbol notice effect explained using FIG. 68 to FIG. 74, FIG. 75 to 78, etc.) Both the full-screen notice effect and the symbol notice effect described as each modification example can be executed.

  For example, before the branch of (B1) (B2) in FIG. 69 or the like, the effect shown in FIG. 37 (or FIG. 38) is executed, and the degree of storage of the number gauge (first number gauge, second number gauge) ( The ratio of branching to (B2) in FIG. 69 and the like may be varied depending on how many regions are stored. Also, in (B2) of FIG. 69 etc., the effect shown in FIG. 37 (or FIG. 38) is executed, and the wording (“chance!” Etc.) in (C2) continues according to the degree of storage of the number gauge. The presence / absence and contents may be different. For example, when the tenth region has been stored, “Intense heat!” May be displayed.

  Immediately after the change, the effect shown in FIG. 37 (or FIG. 38) is executed, and whether to proceed to (B1) in FIG. 69 or (B2) in FIG. 73 depending on the degree of storage of the count gauge. 71, (B1) in FIG. 71, (B2) in FIG. 71, (B1) in FIG. 73, or (B2) in FIG. 73, etc.) . Further, in FIG. 74C, the effect shown in FIG. 37 (or FIG. 38) may be executed, and the expectation that is a big hit may be varied depending on the degree of storage of the number gauge.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and variable display means (for example, a decorative display or the like) that variably displays identification information (for example, decorative symbols) in a predetermined direction. Image display device 5 and the like), notice effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notice effect (for example, full-screen notice effect, etc.) (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S322A and S344A), and a game Detection means (for example, a push sensor 35B capable of detecting a pressing operation on the push button 31B) that can detect an operation on another operating member (for example, a pressing operation on the trigger button 74). It may be a trigger sensor 75 that can be detected, a tilt direction sensor unit 76 that can detect a tilting operation to the stick controller 31A, or an infrared ray. A non-contact type sensor such as a sensor or a motion sensor) and a suggestion display (for example, display of the first effective period gauge) that suggests the effective period of operation (for example, the first effective period). Suggestion display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S2610 and S3307 in the production control microcomputer 90) for changing the display mode of the suggestion display toward a predetermined mode (for example, end mode), and a suggestion display Before the display mode changes to the predetermined mode, a predetermined condition based on the detection of the operation (for example, detecting ten operations on the push button 31B. If the state changes based on the detection of the operation, Specially when a meter, a numerical value, a display effect (effect that defeats an enemy character, or a lamp is turned on in a predetermined state) is established. A specific effect executing means (for example, a part executing step S2622 in the effect control microcomputer 90) capable of executing an effect (for example, the first specific effect), and the predetermined notice effect is displayed at the start of variable display The display mode of the identification information is executed so as to make it invisible or difficult to view (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps S322A and S344A causes the display control of FIG. 69 (B2), FIG. 71 (B2), or FIG. B2)), the identification information is variable in a predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined notice effect when the predetermined notice effect is executed. Display can be started (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S322A, FIG. 69B2 and FIG. 71B2). Or after the elapse of the execution period of the blackout effect shown in FIG. 73 (B2), as shown in FIG. 69 (D2), (E2), FIG. 71 (D), (E) or FIG. 73 (D2) When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the suggestion display execution means changes the display mode of the suggestion display before the display mode of the suggestion display changes to the predetermined mode. (For example, the production control microcomputer 90 performs steps S2606 Y to S2608 or steps S2612 to S2615, thereby avoiding the execution of step S2610 and changing the first effective period gauge. Can be stopped). According to such a configuration, since the change of the suggestion display stops, the actual effective period may be longer than the appearance of the suggestion display, and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the above-described embodiments (first to third embodiments), the gaming machine (so-called first type gaming machine) that shifts to the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result of the special symbol and the production symbol has been described. However, the present invention is based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize (V prize) in a specific prize slot (V prize slot) in a variable prize ball apparatus (so-called role) provided in the game area 2A. It is also possible to apply to a gaming machine to be transferred (so-called second type gaming machine) or a gaming machine that combines the first type and the second type.

  Moreover, although each embodiment demonstrated the gaming machine which transfers to a probability change state based on the type of jackpot that has occurred, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, the game moves to a probable change state, while the specific area is played during the big hit. It is also possible to shift to the normal state when does not pass. In that case, substantial probability variation big hit and non-probability big hit may be realized by changing the ease of passing of the game ball to the specific area according to the big hit type. For example, the easiness of passage of the game ball to the specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the big winning opening according to the big hit type. Specifically, a big hit type with a long opening time of the big winning opening is set as a big hit (substantial probable big hit) that allows a game ball to easily pass to a specific area, and a big hit type with a short opening time of the big winning opening is set to a specific area. It is good also as a big hit (substantial non-probable big hit) that a sphere does not easily pass.

  In each embodiment, in order to notify the change control pattern 90 indicating the change pattern such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of the pseudo-continuity to the effect control microcomputer 90, one change pattern is used when the change is started. Although a gaming machine that transmits a command has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-continuity, whether there is a slip effect, etc. before reaching reach (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Moreover, in each embodiment, although the production control board 12, the audio | voice output board | substrate 13, and the lamp driver board | substrate 14 are provided as a board | substrate with which the circuit which controls an effect apparatus is mounted, one circuit which controls an effect apparatus is provided. You may mount on a board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 5 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 8 and the like) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In each embodiment, “the ratios are different” is not limited to only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. B = 100%: It is a concept that includes those with different ratios in a relationship such as 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In each embodiment, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is described as a gaming machine that directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 is mounted on another board (for example, the audio output board 13 and the lamp driver board 14 shown in FIG. 3, or a circuit function mounted on the audio output board 13 and the lamp driver board 14. (Sound / lamp board having a function by the circuit being used) may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90 on the effect control board 12 via another board. . In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the sound output board 13, the lamp driver board 14, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 5. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 100 in the first embodiment, and the sound output board 13 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 14 or the sound / lamp board.

  Further, in each embodiment, an example is shown in which a prefetch determination is performed on the main side and a command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted to the sub side. However, a command indicating a random number value is transmitted from the main side and a prefetch is performed on the sub side. You may make it judge.

  In each embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are displayed according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. It can be applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are rotated according to the player's stop button operation. Is possible. In that case, when a predetermined condition based on the player's action is established during the effective period, a special role (for example, a big bonus, a regular bonus) accompanied by a transition to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, a game such as a medal As an effect to notify the degree of expectation that it has been confirmed to be a small role accompanied by the addition of utility value, or a re-playing role accompanied by the addition of a replay capable of playing a game without using the gaming value Good. Also, when a predetermined winning combination is won, the transition to AT (assist time) that informs the operation mode (pressing order and pressing timing) of the stop switch that enables the winning combination to be won, or the replay winning It is good also as performing the production | presentation which alert | reports the expectation degree about transfer to RT (replay time) from which a probability differs, and the production | presentation which suggests the setting of the payout rate of a medal.

  The slot machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine value in which bets are set using medals and credits, but a slot machine that sets game bets using game balls as game values, and game values As a full credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number, the number of bets using 15 game balls is used. Is equivalent to setting The pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine are not limited to those using only one type of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, for example, a plurality of types of medals and gaming balls, etc. The game value may be used together. For example, a slot machine can play a game by setting the number of bets using any one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of medals and game balls can be played by winning. Any of the types of gaming value may be paid out.

  Alternatively, although the gaming machine described in each embodiment uses gaming media, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to gaming machines that pay out gaming media as a predetermined number of prizes. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosing game machine that encloses a game medium such as a ball and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine, for example. However, it may be distributed in advance by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

1 Pachinko machine 4A 1st special symbol display 4B 2nd special symbol display 5 Production display device (image display device)
7 Special variable winning ball device 8 Speaker 11 Game control board (main board)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 12 Production control board 13 Audio | voice output board 28A 1st start winning opening 28B 2nd starting winning opening 31B Push button 31A Stick controller 35B Push sensor 76 Tilt direction sensor unit 90 Production control microcomputer 100 Game control microcomputer 103 CPU
109 VDP
120 CPU for effect control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
Variable display means for variably displaying the identification information in a predetermined direction;
A notice effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notice effect;
Special production execution means capable of executing special production,
Detection means capable of detecting the player's movement;
A suggestion display that suggests an effective period of the operation, and a suggestion display execution unit that changes a display mode of the suggestion toward a predetermined mode;
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when a predetermined condition based on the detection of the operation is established before the display mode of the suggestion display is changed to the predetermined mode;
The predetermined notice effect is executed so as to make the display mode of the identification information invisible or difficult to view at the start of the variable display,
The identification information can start variable display in the predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined notice effect when the predetermined notice effect is executed,
The special performance execution means
The special effect can be executed in a display area common to the predetermined notice effect,
The special effect can be executed at the first timing when the predetermined notice effect is executed,
The special effect can be executed at a second timing different from the first timing when the predetermined notice effect is not executed,
The suggestion display execution means can stop the change of the display mode of the suggestion display before the display mode of the suggestion display changes to the predetermined mode when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by

Images